Twice a Year Scientific Journal
Twice a Year Scientific Journal
Twice a Year Scientific Journal
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
PUBLISHER<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences<br />
12 Zmaj Jovina str<br />
11000 Belgrade<br />
Serbia<br />
www.ien.bg.ac.rs<br />
Vol. 43 No. 1-2<br />
<strong>Twice</strong> a <strong>Year</strong> <strong>Scientific</strong> <strong>Journal</strong><br />
ISSN 1821-2573 = Economic Analysis<br />
UDC 33,33<br />
COBISS.SR-ID 169576460<br />
First Published 1967<br />
EDITOR-IN-CHIEF<br />
Mirjana Radović-Marković<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
ASSOCIATE EDITOR<br />
Božo Drašković<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
EDITORIAL BOARD<br />
Aleksandra Bradić~Martinović<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Ivana Domazet<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Božo Drašković<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Dejan Erić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Hasan Hanić<br />
Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />
Dušan Kostić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Gradimir Kožetinac<br />
Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />
Jelica Minić<br />
Regional Cooperation Council - Sarajevo, Bosna<br />
and Herzegovina<br />
Srdjan Redžepagić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Ivan Stošić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Jovan Zubović<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Joăo Sousa Andrade<br />
Universtiy of Coimbra, Portugal<br />
Claude Berthomieu<br />
University of Nice - Sofia Antipolis, France<br />
John Board<br />
ICMA Center, University of Reading, UK<br />
Giuseppe Dutto<br />
University of Torino, Italy<br />
Jean~Paul Guichard<br />
University of Nice - Sofia Antipolis, France<br />
Saša Popović<br />
University of Podgorica, Montenegro<br />
Xavier Richet<br />
University of Paris, France<br />
Adnan Rovčanin<br />
Univesrity of Sarajevo, Bosnia and Herzegovina<br />
Mitja Pavliha<br />
BDO EOS, Ljubljana, Slovenia<br />
Vasileios Kallinterakis<br />
University of Durham, Department of<br />
Economics and Finance, UK
EDITORIAL OFFICE<br />
c/o Institute of Economic Sciences<br />
12, Zmaj Jovina str.<br />
11000 Belgrade<br />
Serbia<br />
Tel. +381 11 2622-357; 2629-960<br />
Fax: +381 (11) 2181~471<br />
www.ien.bg.ac.rs/ea<br />
eaoffice@ien.bg.ac.rs<br />
PUBLISHING BOARD<br />
Radoje Zečević<br />
The College of Tourism, Belgrade<br />
Drago Cvijanović<br />
Institute of Agricultural Economics, Belgrade<br />
Vlastimir Vuković<br />
The College of Tourism, Belgrade<br />
Dragan Milinković Fimon<br />
Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />
Srdjan Redžepagić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Mirjana Radović-Marković<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Božo Drašković<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Gradimir Kožetinac<br />
Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />
Dejan Erić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Ivan Stošić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Slavenko Grgurević<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Dušan Kostić<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
Zvonko Brnjas<br />
Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />
Petar Đukić<br />
Faculty of Technology and Metallurgy, Belgrade<br />
Slobodan Aćimović<br />
Faculty of Economics, Belgrade<br />
Hasan Hanić<br />
Belgrade Banking Academy, Belgrade<br />
BUSINESS SECRETARY<br />
Aleksandar Zdravković<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, Belgrade<br />
aleksandar.zdravkovic@ien.bg.ac.rs<br />
PUBLISHED BY<br />
SP Print, Novi Sad<br />
100 copies<br />
Our journal is indexed in international databases such as: EBSCO Publishing Inc,<br />
GESIS Leibniz-Institute for the Social Sciences and Ullibe University.<br />
Manuscripts are understood to be substantially new and have not been previously published in whole<br />
(excluding conference preceding). Publisher has the copyright to all published articles<br />
Copyright© 2010 by Institute of Economic Sciences Belgrade, All rights reserved.
C O N T E N T S<br />
The Upsurgence of Clusters in the Light of Globalization.................................................... 9-24<br />
Matray Myriam<br />
The Analysis of Long Run Growth Oriented Fiscal Policy.................................................. 25-33<br />
Erős Adrienn<br />
Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers in the Central-East Europe Region in<br />
Comparison with Developed Countries........................................................................................ 34-43<br />
Tej Jakub<br />
Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping Method for the Term Structure of Interest<br />
Rates................................................................................................................................................. 44-49<br />
Glova Jozef<br />
Method of Banks Valuation ........................................................................................................... 50-60<br />
Horvátová Eva<br />
Future Stance of Currencies in the International Monetary System .................................. 61-69<br />
Kotlebova Jana<br />
Differences Between Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices and Consumer Price Indices<br />
in Selected Countries ...................................................................................................................... 70-82<br />
Milecová Zuzana<br />
Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence Employment? ............................................................... 83-90<br />
Vokorokosová Renatá<br />
Information Resources for Financial Monitoring in Enterprises........................................ 91-98<br />
Kościelniak Helena<br />
Business Relations in Reverse Logistics Outsourcing ........................................................ 99-107<br />
Grabara Janusz, Kot Sebastian<br />
Social Aspects in Buyer-Supplier Relationships of SMEs in Hungary ......................... 108-116<br />
Gubik Andrea<br />
Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia...................................................................... 117-125<br />
Střelecká Zdenka<br />
Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm ................................................................ 126-133<br />
Pachura Piotr<br />
Foreign Direct Investment and Global Economic Crisis .................................................. 134-141<br />
Ślusarczyk Beata<br />
Book Reviw:<br />
Inflation and Unemployment ................................................................................................ 142-143<br />
Lovre Ivan, Perić Mladen
Note from the Editor-in-Chief<br />
I am pleased to be able to present this special issue of Economic<br />
Analysis which is devoted to <strong>Scientific</strong> Conference “Economic Prospect in<br />
the Second Decade of the 21 st Century” (14. – 15. April 2010), organized<br />
by Belgrade Banking Academy and Institute of Economic Science in<br />
Belgrade. Furthermore, I am glad to announce that almost articles for this<br />
issue have been collected by Dr Jozef Glova from Faculty of Economics,<br />
Technical university in Košice, Slovakia whom I invited to be our guest<br />
editor and help me in selecting articles for the first issue of Economic<br />
Analysis in 2010. It is another step forward in strengthening cooperation between our partner<br />
institutions. At the same time, work on this issue is more closely connected us with colleagues from<br />
other Faculties of Economics within V4 and countries of South Eastern Europe who provided special<br />
contributions to our peer <strong>Journal</strong> with their high quality papers.<br />
Thanks to everyone for their cooperation with the hope that it will continue in the future.<br />
Prof. dr Mirjana Radović Marković<br />
Editor-in-Chief<br />
Economic Analysis
Guest Editor’s Notes<br />
The current volume of Economic Analysis provides a collection of<br />
original scientific papers and scientific reviews covering a wide range of topics<br />
from small and medium enterprises (SME) research to price stability and<br />
employment research, business logistics and business valuation.<br />
The most of articles were originated through the international cooperation<br />
in education and science of Visegrad Group countries and Serbia in<br />
the field of the Investment, Banking and Business, especially oriented on the<br />
small and medium enterprises. This scientific collaboration is currently cofinanced<br />
by Visegrad Strategic Program project “Strengthening the educational<br />
and scientific collaboration among Faculties of Economics within V4 and countries of South Eastern<br />
Europe” of International Visegrad Fund.<br />
Within the frame of this project we have slowly but surely established international educational<br />
and scientific network of teachers and researchers from Czech Republic, Hungary, Poland, Serbia and<br />
Slovakia (see www.ekf.tuke.sk/ivf to recognize all eight project partners involved). The network<br />
coordinates the mobility of faculties´ project personnel; prepares workshops and meetings on best<br />
practices in educational and scientific areas within topics like Investment, Banking and Business.<br />
We are also pleased to present the most of here published papers personally during the<br />
International <strong>Scientific</strong> Conference “Economic Prospect in the Second Decade of the 21 st Century”<br />
(14. – 15. April 2010) organized by Belgrade Banking Academy and Institute of Economic Science in<br />
Belgrade.<br />
This current volume of Economic Analysis journal covers wide range of economic topics, there<br />
you are<br />
Erős’s paper focuses on the growth theory and discusses the question whether or not<br />
government policies can be used to influence the long run growth rate of the economy. The author<br />
summarize the theoretical and empirical literature of the relationship between fiscal policy and long<br />
run economic growth shortly on the one hand, and on the other hand used the parameter estimates of a<br />
third generation study of developed countries to evaluate the fiscal policy actions taken in Hungary<br />
and in Ireland. She also mapped the explanation for the differences in these two countries’ reactions to<br />
some of the similar fiscal policy changes.<br />
The next three contributions are aimed at theory of investment and business valuation,<br />
especially applied in the financial sector. First one by Horvátová proceeded with bank and financial<br />
institution valuation enlarging the last contributions in Theory of Investment Value by R. C. Merton<br />
using the risk-neutral valuation model and its variants. Very close to this topic is the contribution<br />
focuses on the bank mergers in the Central-East Europe region. In the second one the author Tej<br />
examined and analyzed differences in financial results in the Central and Eastern Europe region in<br />
comparison with developed markets. Finally, in more theoretical oriented paper by Glova the author<br />
attempts to address key issue in designing algorithm for estimating of yield curve. The author<br />
proposed the application of matrix theory in yield curve points estimation.<br />
In her scientific review Kotlebová discusses the future stance of currencies in the International<br />
Monetary System. She mentioned the higher creation of savings in emerging economies compared to<br />
developed countries; higher investments of developed economies in comparison with developing
8<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 7-8)<br />
countries; the current account deficit of the balance of payments in developed countries as opposed to<br />
the current account surplus of the balance of payments in emerging economies create new conditions<br />
for future stance of currencies in the international monetary system. She also highlighted the main<br />
trends in the future development the IMF.<br />
Milecová’s article analyzes the differences between the harmonized indices of consumer prices<br />
and the national consumer price indices on the theoretical as well as on the practical levels. Author<br />
deals with defining the differences between the indices not only in the euro area and in V4-countries,<br />
but also in Serbia. The main differences are geographic and population coverage and owner-occupied<br />
housing. Using statistical methods the author test hypothesis of the difference between different the<br />
indices measuring price stability.<br />
Vokorokosová in her paper addresses the influence and dependency between minimum wage<br />
increase and the amount of employed people. This article picks out minimum wage as an important<br />
part of employment research investigating two files; the number of working people aged 15 – 64 and<br />
all working labours.<br />
Kościelniak reviews and analyzes information resources for financial monitoring in<br />
enterprises.<br />
Grabara’s article focused on business realations in reverse logistics outsourcing, as key aspect<br />
of the cost reduction used in companies during fighting for survival, keeping or increases in sales<br />
levels and profits. More and more often observed tendencies to concentrate commercial and production<br />
companies lead to rise of demand for outsourcing in a reverse logistics chain.<br />
Gubik’s paper intends to introduce the reader to the characteristics of supplier-purchaser<br />
relationships of small- and medium sized enterprises, based on an empirical research’s experiences<br />
using the questionnaire and its statistical evaluation. According to author’s opinion, we can draw<br />
conclusions on the intention to cooperate concerning the nature of the buyer-supplier relationships of<br />
companies, so a wide range of information can be concluded on small- and medium sized enterprises’<br />
partnerships.<br />
Please allow me to express my sincere appreciation to Prof. dr Mirjana Radović Marković for<br />
confidence. Last but not least I want to thank all contributors and reviewers for their excellent work<br />
that they have done.<br />
Jozef Glova
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
The Upsurgence of Clusters in the Light of Globalization<br />
Matray Myriam * , Institut d’Administration des Entreprises IAE - Université Jean Moulin<br />
Lyon 3 Centre de echerche Magellan - Equipe Euristik, France<br />
UDC: 005.44 JEL: O21<br />
ABSTRACT – Clusters, as system of companies anchored in a region, contribute and ensure the<br />
long-term world competitiveness of national production. The object of this paper is to demonstrate that<br />
globalization opens restrictions on growth potential, which can be exploited by the clusters in order to<br />
position themselves on the world markets by maximizing on the benefits of global competition. Thus,<br />
clusters use the advantages of globalization (including a myriad of networks), channeling the negative<br />
effects the latter may cause (taking as an example industrial espionage which has become increasingly<br />
prevalent). Clusters can therefore be a means for firms to be competitive at a time of globalization and,<br />
at the same time, be integrated in the process. Portraying a policy of growth, most European countries<br />
– such as France - have adopted this new industrial policy, which is being introduced in its turn in<br />
some Mediterranean countries (like Morocco for instance).<br />
KEY WORDS: cluster, globalization, competitiveness, knowledge sharing, networks<br />
Introduction<br />
Globalization has released potential for growth; this process is conducive to the<br />
accumulation of skills, knowledge sharing, the intensification of the networks (via<br />
Information and Communication Technology ICT), the synergy companies... Yet it puts the<br />
companies in a new competitive “playground”. In the light of this, businesses adapt<br />
themselves, and new industrial policies are put in place to maximize on the process of<br />
globalization without being caught out by the competition it may generate.<br />
The clusters development policy comes into the framework of. The challenge of these<br />
clusters is to geographically group together firms, public and private research, laboratories<br />
and training organizations engaged in a partnership approach to create synergies in order to<br />
build innovative cooperative projects recognized nationally &/or globally.<br />
The potential benefit of grouping together companies is not a new invention. Marshall 1<br />
described this process as “industrial district” and used the term “industrial atmosphere” to<br />
describe the dynamism generated by cooperation and exchange of know-how within the<br />
district. Since then, Local Productive Systems (SPL) have been organized following the<br />
concept of the industrial district in Prato, near Florence in Tuscany, which constitutes the<br />
first empirical study 2 on this type of industrial concentration by G. Becattini 3 at the end<br />
*<br />
Address: Roanne 42 300 (France), e-mail: myriam.matray@gmail.com<br />
1<br />
Marshall, A. (1890), Principles of Economics, London: Macmillan.<br />
2<br />
In Italy this type of territorial industrial concentration was highlighted by G. Becattini, USA by<br />
A.Scott and France by C. Courlet.
10<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
1970s. Bories-Azeau and Loubès 4 highlight that there is a difference between the concept of<br />
Local Productive Systems SPL and clusters. SPLs were identified in 1997 by the CIADT<br />
(Interministerial committee for regional development) as “a group of companies and<br />
institutions geographically close who work together in the same field.” The afore mentioned<br />
authors write: “Unlike the centered networks, dominated by one or more large enterprise<br />
and clusters 5 , which are subject to a new industrial government strategy, the SPLs are closely<br />
linked local networks, where power is shared amongst their members and consist primarily<br />
of Small and medium size enterprises SMEs”. They also distinguish by their branch. An SPL<br />
is more oriented toward more traditional industries (textile...), unlike a cluster which<br />
specializes in industries with high added value requiring heavy investment (micro-nano<br />
technologies...).<br />
Figure 1. Definition of a cluster 6<br />
Firms<br />
Training centers<br />
Joint by 3 common goals:<br />
- Innovative projects<br />
- Partnership approach<br />
- International renown<br />
Public &/or private<br />
research<br />
The purpose of this paper is to underline the paradox that the cluster is an industrial<br />
policy to maintain national competitiveness arising from the adverse effects of globalization<br />
(relocation, the race for innovation, increased competitiveness, industrial espionage...), whilst<br />
wishing to position itself to face competition in the global market. Therefore the clusters<br />
adapt their development to globalization: first they take globalization to the advantage of<br />
their development, to then be integrated into the globalization to meet international<br />
competition. For these reasons, the “cluster industrial policy” is bolstered. It has been<br />
3<br />
Becattini, G. (1992), “Le District Marshallien : une notion socio-économique”, In Benko, G. and<br />
Lipietz, A. (1992), Les régions qui gagnent, Paris, PUF.<br />
4<br />
Bories-Azeau, I. and Loubès, A. (2007), “Emergence d’un acteur collectif territorial et réseau<br />
d’entreprises : l’exemple de CAMDIB”, Revue RECEMAP, October 2007.<br />
5<br />
// http://www.competitivite.gouv.fr. or: // http://www.observatoiredespoles.com/ and //<br />
http://polescompet.canalblog.com/<br />
6<br />
Source figure 1 : Carel, S. (2005), “La politique française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises<br />
localisés, Technopôles, SPL, pôles de compétitivité : quels enjeux pour les territoires ?”, La politique<br />
française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises localisés, Septièmes Rencontres de Théo Quant, January<br />
2005. // http://thema.univ-fcomte.fr/theoq/pdf/2005/Carel-theoquant05.pdf
Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 11<br />
established in Europe and is developing in Mediterranean countries because it is an<br />
alternative to international competition companies face daily.<br />
Globalization, the strength of clusters<br />
According to Michalet 7 C-A, “globalization is a multidimensional phenomenon, which<br />
encompasses three main elements: the development of trade and the relocating of<br />
production and financial movements. These three elements are interdependent.”<br />
Globalization releases growth potential, yet is causing positive and negative effects.<br />
Increased competitiveness is particularly favorable to consumers but it can also cause the<br />
collapse of a company which fails to stand up to the adversity of competition. Globalization<br />
allows to increase the panel of knowledge fostering innovation, but it can facilitate industrial<br />
espionage, fires the race for innovation and diverts traditional consumer goods in exchange<br />
for increasingly more high tech goods. Globalization has no borders; it is a-territorial which<br />
may cause an issue as to identification of territory. The list of positive and negative impacts<br />
of globalization is exhaustive. In our article we will put forward the core elements of<br />
globalization in clusters.<br />
The a-territoriality of globalization and the anchor-hold of clusters<br />
Paradoxically national &/or global clusters attach importance to the territory in which<br />
they are implanted; it reconciles the global and the local. This new industrial policy, which<br />
has been created to further global competitiveness, thinks “global” but acts “local”. Thus, the<br />
cluster will use the benefits of globalization advantageously to the extent of the networks, by<br />
applying “trade flows” 8 beyond borders, to develop itself.<br />
The agglomeration of enterprises<br />
Businesses in the field of information technology stand to gain by being able to access<br />
technological networks. The advantages constituted by network outsourcing increase by the<br />
number of users. Marshall defined this as non-pecuniary outsourcing which increases profit.<br />
This network outsourcing may explain a paradox: in general, Information and<br />
Communication Technology ICT allows to decentralize the relationship between producers<br />
and buyers, which should allow them to use the means of television as a more<br />
comprehensive tool of communication for instance video conferencing through webcams.<br />
Yet, ironically the tendency is for clusters to concentrate in agglomeration; taking as example<br />
operators, they will tend to seek zones where the demand is strongest and these are<br />
invariably high-density areas. The implantation of clusters takes into account these<br />
“centripetal forces” 9 to facilitate their integration into the territory in which they are to be<br />
located and for quicker development. In this sense, the network does not exclude the notion<br />
7<br />
Michalet, C-A. (2003), “Comptes rendus d’auditions, Mondialisation: une chance pour<br />
l’environnement ?”, 12 March 2003. // http://www.senat.fr/rap/r03-233/r03-23355.html<br />
8<br />
Term used to define an aspect of globalization by Michalet, C-A.<br />
9<br />
Reference to the ʺcentripetal forceʺ on the location of economic activity, analysis developed by<br />
Krugman, P.
12<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
of proximity. Colletis 10 , the specialist in geographical economics, highlights the fact that the<br />
connection of networks is not automatic between the different actors if they do not know<br />
each other, as they need to be built on trust between them. There is in fact no need, indeed, to<br />
be close to innovate: the development of communities of shared practices around the free<br />
software is an illustration, but it facilitates cooperation.<br />
The identity of a cluster<br />
Whereas globalization comes along with a decline of the idea of Nation state, the cluster<br />
integrates into a dynamics of co-construction between the territory which it is implanted and<br />
itself. However, it is not sufficient for the cooperation of the organization of the cluster, it<br />
must be perceived as a process in the construction of an identity so that each member feels<br />
totally integrated in the project. This identity is primarily based on the construction of social<br />
links through reciprocal exchange of rules and values. This sharing of rules and values in an<br />
entrepreneurial environment is particularly reflected in the third part of the following<br />
sections of the economic intelligence which encompasses:<br />
• Industrial espionage with the aim to gain pertinent strategic information,<br />
• The protection of storage of information heritage.<br />
• And the manner of expression which influences the propagation of information or<br />
rules of conduct. The latter can be referred to as “formal capital” as defined by Y.<br />
Bertacchini and L. Oueslati, which they describe as a set of rules and common<br />
procedures (published in “Entre information et processus de communication:<br />
l’intelligence territorial”, 2003. // http: // www.isdm.org).<br />
This third point highlights the role of the formal structure, actually the efficient<br />
functioning of a cluster requires:<br />
• Common opportunities: the ability to work on a common project being the<br />
underlining condition to be integrated as a member of the community,<br />
• The ability of the members to cooperate determined by the capacity of the<br />
members to organize themselves,<br />
• And common rules.<br />
The adoption of common rules will allow a high level of reliability favorable to collective<br />
research, which will consequently lead to the competitiveness of the cluster.<br />
The communal territory plays its role within the pole, in the following quotation Thoenig<br />
J-C. and Waldman C. 11 bring to light the importance of the common values passed on by the<br />
specific geographical area: “the success and the survival of a company lie in its capacity to<br />
conquer, to define and to develop a territorial and economic community. A territory is<br />
established by multiple stakeholders (customers, suppliers, employees, civic associations,<br />
circles of experts, etc.) whom the company federates around its project, by means of common<br />
values and interests, shared identities, and lasting partnerships. The reference to its territory<br />
constitutes its code of conduct”. Everyone identifies with their own roots; the expression of<br />
10<br />
Colletis, G. (2005), “Entreprises et territoires : proximités et développement local”, published in:<br />
Entreprises, réseaux et territoires, 22 March 2005.<br />
11<br />
Thoenig, J-C. and Waldman, C. (2005), De l’entreprise marchande à l’entreprise marquante, Editions<br />
d’Organisation.
Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 13<br />
Blaise Pascal, “the Truth lies on this side of the Pyrenees, the wrongs beyond”, or another<br />
common expression, “to each their own truth”, both reflect this territorial culture and<br />
illustrate the relativism which is a doctrine according to which no one opinion is absolutely<br />
true, each bearing meaning solely with regards to an active point of reference. This point of<br />
reference which can be an individual, a company, a culture, an industrial branch (chemistry,<br />
textile, toys & games...), a place. These traditional forms of territorial anchoring seal the<br />
future in such way that the crisis of a company becomes the crisis of the territory, and the<br />
decline of an organization rhymes with social drama (Perrat, and Zimmermann, 2003) such<br />
as the decline of the textile SPL in Roanne.<br />
As has been noted through the notion of identity, rules, and skills specific to the cluster,<br />
its identity shapes itself by ʺthe identification with the internal environment and the<br />
differentiation with the external environmentʺ (Bouchet Y., Bertacchini Y., Noël L.). Thus, the<br />
adherence to the cluster can be explained by the shape of the social networks it is made up<br />
of.<br />
Between a-territoriality and territoriality<br />
The cluster can be assimilated to a specific territory, a place. The place becomes a pole, a<br />
center connected with other centers. Jean-Louis Guigou, a delegate to land settlement and to<br />
regional function DATAR (from 1997 till 2002), highlighted the role of the territory faced<br />
with globalization by quoting: ““if globalization imposes itself on us, territorialisation<br />
depends on us”. This quotation, which I often used, is somewhat simplistic.” But it<br />
underlines this powerful dialectic between the global and the local that some American<br />
academics illustrated through the concept of “glocalization”. If our societies have indeed<br />
considerably increased their interdependence and their flow of exchange, and if companies<br />
have become more and more international and sometimes have given the impression of<br />
nomadism, territories are nevertheless becoming more and more strategic supports of the<br />
contemporary economic development, if they know how to organize themselves.” 12 In this<br />
way, the cluster integrates this notion of territory. Its location is carefully chosen and is<br />
proportional to its renown. It is also assimilated to the city in which it is to be implanted. So<br />
the cluster will gradually be made reference to by the city of the pole and vice-versa. The<br />
success of the pole will also be assimilated to the success of the city in which it is implanted<br />
as the latter benefits from positive externalities.<br />
Thus, the cluster channels globalization by offering it a specific space. This territorial<br />
anchorage allows it to build up a physical and moral reason in order to eventually project<br />
itself on the global markets.<br />
The accumulation of skills in globalization and the sharing of knowledge<br />
within the cluster<br />
According to the latest work of Michalet 13 the traffic of goods, capital and technology is<br />
more and more intra industrial and intra enterprise. That is to say outer market. The cluster<br />
integrates this idea and favors the collaborative research.<br />
12<br />
Foreword by Guigou, J-L., In Loinger, G. and Nemery, J-C. (1998), “Recomposition et<br />
développement des territoires, enjeux économiques, processus, acteurs”, L’Harmattan.<br />
13<br />
Michalet, C-A. (2007), Mondialisation, la grande rupture, La Découverte.
14<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
Cluster: factor for uniting agents<br />
This bringing together of actors, companies, researchers... is made all the easier as<br />
globalization allows a stake in their network, their research (with the example of the portals<br />
of information) and even if they come from different countries. It is the materialization of<br />
“brainstorming”, making to unite a diversity of agents coming from different backgrounds<br />
with the objective to create common motor driving innovative projects through the clusters.<br />
Actually, one of the first factors of success of a cluster is the joint presence on a common<br />
geographical location with public or private research centers and companies specialized in<br />
high technologies as well as local economic actors. The aim being to facilitate the exchange of<br />
information between these actors in order to set up a process of communication by<br />
appropriate networks with the intention to transferring of skills and diffusing innovation.<br />
The pole functions with a logic of collective intelligence 14 , catalyst of collective wealth,<br />
sharing of knowledge: essential elements to facilitate and to activate research upon which<br />
this entrepreneurial culture is founded. This collaborative research generates innovation<br />
aiming for competitiveness on a national or international level. However, it is to be<br />
emphasized that the collective intelligence is a perpetual process 15 and the information<br />
passed on in this way is the conveyor of competitiveness because it represents the strategic<br />
information, which belongs to the pole in question and to none other. The challenge is to<br />
constantly try to acquire new information in the advent of scientific breakthroughs.<br />
The sharing of the knowledge in the lap of the cluster<br />
Globalization and in particular ICT globalization gives everyone access to the required<br />
data bases, but these latter ones will only become information once they have been treated<br />
and they will only constitute knowledge once they have been assimilated and retranscribed<br />
by way of strategic decisions for the future of the pole. Amongst the advantages of a cluster<br />
is the sharing of information. Zimmermann puts forward the following characteristic within<br />
firms: the greater the degree of sharing (intervention of a large number of groups in the same<br />
scheme), the better is the ʺalchemyʺ of the functioning of the pole. The creation of the<br />
network is not immediate; trust is indispensable between the members all the more as not<br />
the whole of the information can be passed on by ICT. As a matter of fact, explicit knowledge<br />
can be transmitted by distance, whereas the implicit knowledge can only be conveyed face to<br />
14<br />
Collective intelligence “is specifically to enhance the diversity of knowledge, skills and ideas which<br />
are in a community and to organize this diversity of knowledge, skills and ideas which are present in<br />
a community and to organize this diversity in a creative and productive dialogue”. Quote of Zara, O.<br />
(2005), “Le management de l’intelligence collective: vers une nouvelle gouvernance”, M2 éditions,<br />
2005, In Knauf, A. (2006), “Le rôle des acteurs dans un dispositif régional d’intelligence économique:<br />
La place de l’informédiaire en tant que médiateur et animateur du dispositif” 2006. //<br />
http://hal.inria.fr/docs/00/10/73/12/PDF/knauf_numeroIE2006_corrige.pdf<br />
15<br />
Zartarian, M., Centraliens, November 1998, In Carayon, B. (2003), Intelligence économique,<br />
compétitivité et cohésion sociale, La Documentation Française, p. 111 : “Economic intelligence has<br />
fundamentally three main vocations: - Control and protection of scientific, technological and<br />
competitive storage of information heritage - Detention of threats and opportunities that the company<br />
may face - Constitution of influence strategies for the companies. The process is continuous,<br />
permanent and heuristics, with the aim to improve the competitiveness of the company by giving it<br />
the means to know and understand its environment to illuminate its decisions.”
Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 15<br />
face. Whilst ICT, IE tools, should logically amplify the functioning of a virtual economic<br />
system, the reality is quite the contrary: interpersonal communication or “face to face”<br />
remains essential as is apparent in the structure of a pole. It begs the question as to how to<br />
allow the exchange of strategic information in this competitive environment? ICT networks<br />
are easily seen through, “pirated”, by the same token “face to face” remains an IE tool in the<br />
same way as ICT. In that way the interest in a neutral public space contributes to the process<br />
of the IE: restaurants, cafeteria... often in these places, described by I.N. Fisher as “social<br />
spaces” for informal meetings with implicit exchanges. The paradox of the “IE is to be<br />
immaterial and remote and yet close to all” 16 . The most expressive example remains that of<br />
“The City” (London’s financial center) where bankers and traders daily exchange strategic<br />
information (economic surveillance...). This process, as long as it continues, ensures the life<br />
of London’s financial market. Neutral public areas are indispensable just like trust, which<br />
has to reign between the agents. Information, knowledge and inventions have to be brought<br />
together and protected; therefore trust is fundamental within the cluster (Bertacchini Y.,<br />
Bouchet Y., and Noël L.) 17 . According to Bertacchini Y. and Herbaux P.: “A territorial<br />
intelligence is an organizational culture based on sharing and treatment of the signals from<br />
the economic actors who are destined to supply decisive information to the leaders, at the<br />
appropriate time”. Mohellebi D. and Dou H. (2007) highlight that the passing on of<br />
information springs from a corporate culture, that is to say to sensitize and motivate the<br />
members. The clusters shape strategic places of exchanges of information, thanks to the<br />
neutral spaces where trust reigns and gradually establish a business atmosphere and a<br />
corporate culture resting on exchange and cooperation. These phenomena mobilize the<br />
exchange of decisive information in the clusters which constitute a “competitive advantage”<br />
(Porter, 1990).<br />
The storage of information heritage of the cluster and globalization<br />
The clusters are connected to other places via ICT. In fact, with globalization, not to be<br />
marginalized, the adoption of ICTs is fundamental. The ICT, the main tools of Economic<br />
Intelligence IE, are defined as all the techniques applied in the treatment and the<br />
transmission of information, mainly computing, Internet and telecommunications. Just as the<br />
pole benefits from a national and international renown by appropriation of the ICT. The<br />
clusters need broadband telecommunication networks and all other contributions of the ICTs<br />
in order to function and develop themselves. ICTs also allow potential market expansion<br />
(electronic commerce). The globalization of ICTs has nevertheless its limits as far as safety<br />
and ethical terms are concerned. In the event IE intervenes to protect storage of information<br />
heritage. Thus, the ICTs are limitated as regards to the exchange of information in<br />
competitive environment. Indeed, Bouchet Y., Bertacchini Y., and Noël L., note that trust is a<br />
process built without experience and consequently is contingent upon the safeguard of<br />
information. Furthermore, authors like Ivan Samson, observe that SMEs implanted in a<br />
16<br />
Author’s quote<br />
17<br />
Bouchet, Y. and Bertacchini, Y. and Noël, L. (2008), “Construire la confiance dans les échanges<br />
numériques, cas dans un pôle de compétitivité”, ISDM Informations, Savoirs, Décisions & Médiations,<br />
3 rd quarter 2008.
16<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
territory which is holder of positive externalities continue to develop strategies for<br />
competition and cooperation 18 amongst themselves.<br />
These lines of thought demonstrate the interest of clusters which wisely use globalization<br />
to maximize on its own development. The cluster channels the negative effects globalization<br />
may cause (absence of identity status due to the a - territoriality; the skepticism of the<br />
exchange of strategic information via ICT, hence the interest of face to face; the fear of<br />
espionage hence the need for the pole to restore confidence and security of information) and<br />
uses the benefits globalization provides (a myriad of networks, globalization of ICT and its<br />
absence of virtual borders). Gradually the new industrial policy of clusters has proven its<br />
strength in the light of globalization and plays the role of a policy for growth to gain the<br />
required competitiveness to integrate itself in the stream of globalization.<br />
The industrial policy of a cluster<br />
The objective of this policy is twofold; internal development of the territory in which it is<br />
located and external development namely:<br />
• Disseminate innovation (F. Perroux) in the territory in which the cluster is located,<br />
develop territorial economic activity<br />
• Promote competitiveness national and worldwide renown.<br />
Thus, in order to achieve the objectives of the pole what matters, according to J.<br />
Savatier 19 , is the will for putting in place networking actors, yet this will is evolutionary, just<br />
like social networks which make up the pole. Thus, according to Edward S. et al (2004)<br />
“networks experience endogenous development related to the transformation of links,<br />
objectives and members [...] but also changes in the external environment.” To adapt to these<br />
changes and promote cooperation EI is fundamental as it maintains the renewal of<br />
information on a daily basis in order to have data updated through the process of spying<br />
being conducive to research. EI also maintains the notion of trust through the protection of<br />
storage of information heritage. As an extension to the first part, the emphasis will be on the<br />
cluster as a component of integration into the globalization process.<br />
The objectives of an industrial policy of clusters as illustrated in France<br />
Thus, in order to assimilate these economic changes associated with globalization an<br />
industrial policy focused on the territory was established by the CIACT (Interministerial<br />
Committee for Planning and Competitiveness in Territories). From 2005 to 2007, 71 clusters<br />
were officially recognized as such in France, amongst which 7 were distinguished as world<br />
clusters and 10 as potential world ones.<br />
18<br />
Bouchet, Y., Bertacchini, Y. and Noël, L. (2008), “Construire la confiance dans les échanges<br />
numériques, cas dans un pôle de compétitivité”, ISDM Informations, Savoirs, Décisions & Médiations,<br />
3 rd quarter 2008.<br />
19<br />
Savatier, J. (2007), “ Table-ronde d’ouverture “l’innovation et l’anticipation des mutations<br />
économiques et sociales : perspectives européenne”” in “innovation et anticipation des mutations<br />
économiques et sociales”, Seminar organized by the European Commission, Diact and DGEFP,<br />
Bordeaux, 22-24 October 2007.
Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 17<br />
History of the establishment of clusters; new industrial strategy of government.<br />
Figure 2. History of the establishment of clusters<br />
2002 Implementation of a strategic committee by Jean-Pierre Raffarin CIADT of 13<br />
December 2002.<br />
2003 Establishment of an ʺindustrialʺ working group<br />
2004 Datar Report – “France, an industrial power”- February<br />
Blanc Report - ʺFor an ecosystem of growthʺ - March<br />
Financial bill for 2005 presented by Nicolas Sarkozy (Art. 24)<br />
CIADT of 14 September 2004<br />
Call for presentation of projects of ʺclustersʺ - November<br />
2005 Closure of the call for presentation of projects - 28 February 2005<br />
Completion of inquiry by technical experts of projects - May 9<br />
Establishment of the Group of qualified actors - May 16<br />
Proposal of the Interministerial Working Group to Government - end June<br />
CIADT of 12 July 2005 – Official recognition of the 67 cluster projects<br />
CIADT of 14 October 2005 - Validation of draft contracts and field of R & D.<br />
Decree of 14 October 2005 – “Interministerial Committee for Planning and<br />
development of territories” CIADT is renamed “Interministerial Committee<br />
for Planning and Competitiveness in Territories” CIACT.<br />
2007 5 July 2007, 71 clusters are officially recognized<br />
Source: Jacquet, N. and Darmon, D. (2005), “Les pôles de compétitivité. Le modèle français”,<br />
Documentation française, coll. Etudes n°5225.<br />
Criteria of quality selected for agreement of cluster<br />
F. Leroy 20 , head of Mission, member of the working group ʺclustersʺ, Management of<br />
entreprises, MINEFI, outlines the main objectives of clusters namely:<br />
• Strengthen competitiveness of the national territory,<br />
• Boosting economic development,<br />
• Create or maintain jobs in industry,<br />
• And attracting investment and expertise at European level and globally.<br />
In view of this, in order to be recognized as a cluster, a draft project of pole must meet the<br />
specified criteria defined in November 2004 by the government. The following four criteria<br />
are decisive:<br />
• A development strategy consistent with the economic development of the<br />
territory of the pole,<br />
• A development strategy consistent with the local dynamism and performance of<br />
the economic fabric in the light of international competition,<br />
• Sufficient international recognition, both industrially &/or technologically.<br />
The projects submitted must eventually pave the way to a leading position worldwide in<br />
their specific fields. The second criterion refers to a distinction between the poles with the<br />
20<br />
Leroy, F. (2005), “Pôles de compétitivité : de l’appel à projets à la labellisation”. Entreprises, réseaux<br />
et territoires, 22 March 2005.
18<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
main focus on technological research activities and the strength of interactions between<br />
research centers and companies working on the development in a field of technology by<br />
comparison to the dominant industrial poles which cluster companies with more concretely<br />
applied R & D and consequently is closer to the immediate market.<br />
• A partnership between actors and a structured, operational management.<br />
• In actual fact, the quality and efficiency of R & D partnerships between agents<br />
(industrials, researchers, lecturers...) are the main criteria for official recognition of<br />
a cluster.<br />
• The ability to create synergies in research and development and bring new wealth<br />
with high added values.<br />
The ultimate goal is to improve the competitiveness of the French offer on international<br />
markets.<br />
In Europe, the lack of competitiveness persists and is worsening specifically in view of a<br />
stronger euro. The new policy allows to draw benefits from this situation with companies<br />
benefitting from the disinflationary effect of the strong euro on the cost of raw materials in<br />
particular. Europe places high value on quality, this being the only way it can face<br />
competition dominated by cost. The purpose of the clusters is to accentuate Europeʹs<br />
competitiveness with the desire to achieve the goals set in 2000 by the Lisbon summit 21 .<br />
The initiative of clusters in the Mediterranean countries via the Euro-<br />
Mediterranean partnership with the example of Morocco<br />
Mediterranean countries having specialized in low cost production for a long time, are<br />
feeling the brunt from competition, especially in traditional sectors (e.g. textiles), from India,<br />
from Asia or eastern countries. They are also faced with the dumping of international<br />
monetary exchange.<br />
The cluster policy is at its initial stages. It is in their interest to integrate this new<br />
perspective to update and show off the advantages of their know-how through globalization.<br />
The challenge is to assert themselves in gathering their expertise to give a quantitative and<br />
qualitative added value to production, a competitive advantage in order to revitalize the<br />
Mediterranean economy on the international market. Hence the establishment of support<br />
plans with the financial aid of the European Union.<br />
Since the autumn of 1995, the Barcelona process, provides a framework for relations<br />
between the EU and the countries of the southern shores of the Mediterranean and with the<br />
objective to work towards building a Euro-Mediterranean shared prosperity and progressive<br />
introduction of free trade. It is a turning point in the relations between EU and its<br />
21<br />
This strategy of clusters puts forward the regional appeal. It was highlighted at the Lisbon summit<br />
in 2000, at which the heads of States set the objective to make Europe the leading world region for its<br />
competitiveness by 2010, « The most dynamic economic knowledge and the most competitive in the<br />
world able to sustain a lasting economic growth » by investing 3% of the gross domestic product GDP.<br />
Seven years on, it has severely fallen behind as none of the countries have stuck to the set objectives<br />
except Finland (in particular with the development of Nokia, the renowned telecommunication<br />
cluster) and Sweden. The only two countries having honored their engagement to dedicate 3% of their<br />
GDP to R&D activities.
Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 19<br />
Mediterranean neighbors. Through this process, the European Commission supports specific<br />
projects to sustain development through an expansionary fiscal policy. Thus, the launch of a<br />
European Neighborhood Policy to support the Euro-Mediterranean Partnership, has been<br />
initiated for numerous projects amongst which the MEDA projects (acronym for measure<br />
adjustment). Similarities of local policies with Europe appear as the emergence of the policy<br />
initiative of clusters combining endogenous growth, territorial economic intelligence leading<br />
to world renown. The trend of “glocalization” is gradually becoming a widespread policy of<br />
regional development for global competitiveness. The Barcelona II conference, held in<br />
November 2005, led in particular to a stronger political partnership. Thus Morocco manages<br />
to do the bulk of its trade with the European Union, which, on 13 October 2008, awarded it<br />
the “advanced status”, setting it halfway between partnership and membership. Morocco is<br />
the first of the Mediterranean partner countries to have been awarded this status which<br />
strengthens the partnership: the opportunities for cooperation with the European Union are<br />
providing a broader and more liberal trade, an enhanced political dialogue, exchanges<br />
relating to foreign and internal security policy issues and allowing access to certain<br />
programs and community agencies with budgetary support as of 2013.<br />
Initiation by Mediterranean countries to engage partnerships<br />
Since 2004, the Mediterranean partners and Libya - except Turkey who began<br />
negotiations with the European Union on 3 October 2005 - are also included in a new set up:<br />
the European Neighborhood Policy started in March 2003 for the countries not belonging to<br />
the Union. The following tables highlight the positioning of the Mediterranean countries<br />
compared to the EU.<br />
Table 1. Economic indicators of the Mediterranean countries and the EU<br />
Economic indicators Algeria Morocco Tunisia European Union<br />
Population (2007) 33 333 216 33 757 175 10 227 157 490 426 060<br />
Rate of growth (2006) 3 % 7.3 % 5.2 %<br />
Rate of growth of the 27 (2007)<br />
countries<br />
2.9 %<br />
Unemployment rate (2006) 9.7 % 1 13.9 % 8.5 %<br />
Source: http://www.statistiques-mondiales.com/index.html<br />
1<br />
http://www.imf.org/external/np/ms/2007/fra/061107af-1.gif<br />
Table 2. Progression of growth rate of the Mediterranean countries<br />
Growth rate progression 2002 2 2005 3 2006 2007 2008 3<br />
Algeria 4.1 % 5.3 % 3 % 6.5 % 5.4 %<br />
Morocco 3.2 % 1.8 % 7.3 % 3.2 % 4.9 %<br />
Tunisia 1.7 % 4.2 % 5.2 % 5.8 %<br />
North African countries 5.2 %<br />
Source: http://www.statistiques-mondiales.com/index.html<br />
2<br />
Statistics of the World Bank. // http://www.worldbank.org/data/countrydata/ countrydata.html<br />
3<br />
According to the FMI report, “Les perspectives de l’économie mondiale”.
20<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
Table 3. Mediterranean countries and their trade volume<br />
2002 Algeria Morocco Tunisia<br />
Balance of payment (% of GDP) 7.7 % 2.9 % -3.5 %<br />
Trade volume with the EU (Mio €) 22 377 13 992 13 629<br />
EU balance of trade (Mio €) -6 201 1 402 1 539<br />
Direct foreign investment (Mio USD) 1 100 428 794.8<br />
Source: Statistics of the World Bank<br />
http://www.worldbank.org/data/countrydata/ countrydata.html<br />
The levels of development of the partner countries are very unequal, particularly in terms<br />
of population and GDP. With the extension of the EU on 1 May 2004, the EU has integrated<br />
two out of the twelve Mediterranean partners 22 namely Cyprus and Malta. The<br />
Mediterranean countries with the highest population have been statistically identified<br />
(Algeria, Morocco, Tunisia) in order to establish a comparison with the European Union. In<br />
2002 these countries had already recorded trade with the EU with growth rates of 4.1% for<br />
Algeria, 3.2% for Morocco and 1.7% for Tunisia respectively. Now set in a growing phase,<br />
the Mediterranean countries continue to increase their growth rates with 3% for Algeria,<br />
7.3% for Morocco and 5.2% for Tunisia in 2006; the drops being mainly due to drought and<br />
rising oil prices. Thus the North African countries have an estimated growth rate of 5.2% for<br />
2008 while the 27 European Union countries stagnated with a growth rate of 2.9%. The Euro-<br />
Mediterranean partnership is of equal importance to each. It allows the EU to expand its<br />
markets and formally establish constructive partnerships, as in the field of textile following<br />
the dismantling of Multi-Fiber Agreement MFA in 2005. As for the Mediterranean countries<br />
the Barcelona process allows to uphold past relations with the EU, to position themselves as<br />
partners with the EU in the face of competition from new entrants from Eastern countries<br />
into the EU, which increasingly monopolize the EU budget, and can to acquire new markets<br />
by teaming up with the EU as united front facing up to competition from emerging<br />
countries. This partnership now englobes thirty-seven countries of which twenty-seven<br />
being EU member countries and ten being Mediterranean partner countries.<br />
The cluster policy: the emergence of a new strategy in Mediterranean countries<br />
through the MEDA program…<br />
In order to further optimize the Euro-Mediterranean partnership, the agreement provides<br />
tools for financial cooperation to support the economic move within the Mediterranean<br />
partner countries. It revolves around various support plans such as the MEDA projects,<br />
projects from the FEMIP (Facility for Euro-Mediterranean Investment and Partnership)... The<br />
interest in this research focuses on the MEDA projects in Morocco. The MEDA program,<br />
agreed by the European Council of Cannes in June 1995, is one of financial instruments for<br />
the implementation of the Euro-Mediterranean Partnership. Through this program, the<br />
22<br />
The twelve Mediterranean partners are Algeria, Cyprus, Egypt, Israel, Jordan, Lebanon, Malta,<br />
Morocco, Syria, Tunisia, and Turkey.
Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 21<br />
European Union provides financial and technical assistance to Mediterranean partners to<br />
enable them to achieve the objectives set out in the Barcelona Declaration bearing three<br />
components: political, economic and social. The main focus being on the economic element<br />
which has as its objective to progressively establish a free trade. The economic component<br />
has facilitated financial cooperation through various support projects such as the MEDA<br />
program and loans from the European Investment Bank. Thus, a global budget is granted by<br />
project not by country. It is the European Commission which, in collaboration with each<br />
individual Mediterranean partner, is developing programs to aid the economic transition,<br />
funded under MEDA. These programs can take different forms including “private sector<br />
development support, economic transition support, sustainable socio-economic development<br />
support and structural adjustment programs support” 23 . The beneficiaries of funding by the<br />
MEDA program are the States, the regions, the local authorities, government agencies and<br />
non-governmental organizations within EU countries and Mediterranean partner countries.<br />
The role of MEDA program in Morocco<br />
The MEDA program aims to adapt to the new dynamics of competitiveness through<br />
sustainable development, job creation and wealth. It allowed the establishment of Support<br />
Project Units (UAP), MEDA project management entities. In Morocco, they focus in<br />
particular on human resources development 24 (education, training), of which three<br />
specifically selected fields of activity drive its economy: tourism, textiles, the New<br />
Information Technologies and Communication (NTIC). These projects emphasize (vocational<br />
training, skills-based approach) and develop these fields in order to meet the needs of social<br />
and economic development in view of international expansion. What is the relation with the<br />
cluster policy? The importance of the role of training. This method involves the process of<br />
economic intelligence in companies in a given geographical territory. The capital of human<br />
training &/or else the presence of appropriate infrastructures are the first phase of emergence<br />
to initiate a cluster policy.<br />
The governance aspect may also intervene in such instances as uneven geographical<br />
location of Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) in a territory and a country<br />
(importance of the role of clusters regarding the distribution of innovation and transmission<br />
of knowledge). In this context Y. Bertacchini stresses the utter importance of ICT territorial<br />
integration with an initiative of information and communication “at risk of being<br />
marginalized nationally and internationally” 25 . As a result governance can cover all or part<br />
of the draft economic development, hence the importance of integrating the functioning of a<br />
cluster in Mediterranean countries.<br />
Expected results for 2010<br />
Results forecast for 2010 would be:<br />
23<br />
“Union européenne et Méditerranée”, la Documentation française. //<br />
http://www.ladocumentationfrancaise.fr/dossiers/europe-mediterranee/index.shtml<br />
24<br />
Some projects have also focused on the development of infrastructures, trunk roads, and other fields<br />
of activity.<br />
25<br />
Bertacchini, Y. and Oueslati, L. (2003), “Entre information et processus de communication:<br />
l’intelligence territoriale”. // http://www.isdm.org
22<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
• “In tourism, training of 72 000 young people, including 18 000 through<br />
apprenticeships and upgrading of human resources;<br />
• In textile, training of 75 000 young people, including 30 000 through<br />
apprenticeships, the achievement of a basic literacy skills program for the benefit<br />
of 50 000 workers and upgrading of human resources;<br />
• In ICT, training of 63 000 young people and upgrading of human resources” 26<br />
The interest to define these objectives is to emphasize the achievement of training in these<br />
three driving fields.<br />
These support plans, including the MEDA program, constitute the beginnings of an<br />
industrial policy of clusters for the Mediterranean countries. According to Michalet CA.,<br />
Globalization is not yet a global phenomenon. Only some countries are concerned: in<br />
addition to the countries of the Triad - EU, North America and Japan - there are fifteen<br />
emerging economies: China, India, the newly industrialized countries (the Dragons) and the<br />
Asian Tigers in Asia, Mexico, Chile and Brazil in Latin America, Poland, Hungary, Slovenia<br />
and the Czech Republic in central Europe. Thus, countries on the sidelines of globalization<br />
seek to attract foreign investment (one of the four objectives of the cluster policy) because<br />
they fear marginalization. In this way the Mediterranean countries wishing to become more<br />
industrialized, to increase their export in order to better position themselves vis-à-vis<br />
competition and therefore to be able to be integrated in the flow of globalization.<br />
Conclusion<br />
The cluster is defined as “a system of enterprises rooted in a region where interactivity<br />
helps to secure long-term global competitiveness of national production” 27 ; this quotation<br />
reflects the fact that the pole is a territorial representation of globalization. So, it was<br />
demonstrated in the first part that the cluster, in order to develop, incorporates in its<br />
functioning that which globalization brings with it. Furthermore, this policy was created to<br />
be consistent with market expectations, which are ever more demanding, and its everincreasing<br />
race for innovation. Consequently this policy is reflected in relation to these new<br />
conditions, which are becoming relentlessly more difficult to fulfil (importance of<br />
innovation, importance of investment in research and training, particularly in higher<br />
education, complexity of innovative processes...). This policy proposes development<br />
prospects. With this logic, competitiveness clusters gradually become a model of industrial<br />
performance. In effect, changing technology and accelerating markets have brought about<br />
the change. What is now required is to combine expertise in the diverse fields of technology<br />
with a speedy and well-timed reactivity on the market of innovations. These two major<br />
issues make the process of “collaborative innovation” unavoidable. Accordingly the clusters<br />
have permitted to put in place those conditions imposed by globalization and, paradoxically,<br />
in order to remain or to be integrated in the globalization process, to allow the country in<br />
which they are implanted optimum competitiveness. The cluster is primarily a policy of<br />
growth hence the interest to continue to support this policy in European countries and to<br />
introduce it in Mediterranean countries so that everyone can take a stand in the light of<br />
26<br />
Meda Website of Morocco. // http://www.meda2-fp.ma/<br />
27<br />
Samson, I. (2008) under the direction of., L’économie contemporaine en leçons, Dalloz.
Matray, M., The Upsurgence of Clusters, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 9-24) 23<br />
competition and confirms their position in global markets. The dominant overall<br />
configuration of the financial profitability is fragile, the industrial policy of clusters might<br />
therefore become the basis for a “new governance”, to correct, to channel the excesses of<br />
globalization. As the term “governance” highlights, it is also important to clarify the role of<br />
institutions for the implementation of poles. The author Colletis mentions the need for<br />
institutional agents for the creation and sustainability of the pole, whether it be in<br />
infrastructure, equipment, funding research programs, partnerships with the region,<br />
department, local organization or chambers of trade and industry. European funds for the<br />
establishment of clusters in France or government aid through projects such as MEDA<br />
programs in Mediterranean countries show how imperative involvement of institutional<br />
bodies is for the credibility of a project, for its launch and for its sustainability over time.<br />
References<br />
Angelier, J-P. (2007), Economie des industries de réseau, Presses Universitaires de Grenoble PUG<br />
Becattini, G. (1992), “Le District Marshallien : une notion socio-économique”, In Benko, G. and Lipietz,<br />
A. (1992), Les régions qui gagnent, Paris, PUF.<br />
Bertacchini, Y. and Oueslati, L. (2003), “Entre information et processus de communication:<br />
l’intelligence territoriale”. //http://www.isdm.org<br />
Bories-Azeau, I. and Loubès, A. (2007), “Emergence d’un acteur collectif territorial et réseau<br />
d’entreprises : l’exemple de CAMDIB”, October 2007, Revue RECEMAP.<br />
Bouchet, Y. and Bertacchini, Y. and Noël, L. (2008), “Construire la confiance dans les échanges<br />
numériques, cas dans un pôle de compétitivité”, 3rd quarter 2008, ISDM Informations, Savoirs,<br />
Décisions & Médiations.<br />
Bougnoux, D. (2001), Introduction aux sciences de la communication, Editions La Découverte & Syros,<br />
Paris.<br />
Carayon, B. (2003), Intelligence économique, compétitivité et cohésion sociale, La Documentation<br />
Française.<br />
Carel, S. (2005), “La politique française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises localisés,<br />
Technopôles, SPL, pôles de compétitivité : quels enjeux pour les territoires ?”, La politique<br />
française de développement de réseaux d’entreprises localisés, Septièmes Rencontres de Théo<br />
Quant, January 2005. //http://thema.univ-fcomte.fr/theoq/pdf/2005/Carel-theoquant05.pdf<br />
Colletis, G. (2005), “Entreprises et territoires : proximités et développement local”, published in:<br />
Entreprises, réseaux et territoires, 22 March 2005.<br />
Dupuy, C. and Burmeister, A. and al. (2003), Entreprises et territoires, les nouveaux enjeux de la<br />
proximité, Paris, La documentation Française.<br />
Future study of DATAR under the direction of Darmon, D. (2004), La France, puissance industrielle,<br />
une nouvelle politique industrielle par les territoires, La documentation française, Paris.<br />
Ferguene, A. and Hsaini, A. (1998), “Développement endogène et articulation entre globalisation et<br />
territorialisation : éléments d’analyse à partir du cas de Ksar-Hellal”, Revue Région et<br />
Développement n°7-1998.<br />
Fischer, G.N. (1980), Espace industriel et liberté, Paris, PUF, Coll, p. 45-46. In Mérenne-Schoumaker, B.<br />
(2002), La localisation des industries, enjeux et dynamiques, les PUR (Presses Universitaires de<br />
Rennes), p. 54.<br />
Jacquet, N. and Darmon, D. (2005), Les pôles de compétitivité. Le modèle français, Documentation<br />
française, coll. Etudes n°5225.
24<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 9-24)<br />
Knauf, A. (2006), “Le rôle des acteurs dans un dispositif régional d’intelligence économique : La place<br />
de l’informédiaire en tant que médiateur et animateur du dispositif”. //<br />
http://hal.inria.fr/docs/00/10/73/12/PDF/knauf_numeroIE2006_corrige.pdf<br />
Loinger, G. and Némery, J-C. (1998), Recomposition et développement des territoires, enjeux<br />
économiques, processus, acteurs, L’Harmattan.<br />
Michalet, C-A. (2003), “Comptes rendus d’auditions, Mondialisation : une chance pour<br />
l’environnement ?”, 12 March 2003. // http://www.senat.fr/rap/r03-233/r03-23355.html<br />
Michalet, C-A. (2007), Mondialisation, la grande rupture, La Découverte.<br />
Mohellebi, D. and Dou, H. (2007), “Les nouvelles technologies de l’information et de la<br />
communication & la capitalisation des compétences internes de l’entreprise”, ISDM 31, //<br />
http://isdm.univ-tln.fr<br />
Némery, J-C. (2006), Les pôles de compétitivité dans le système français et européen, approches sur les<br />
partenariats institutionnels, L’Harmattan.<br />
Perrat, J. and Zimmermann, J.-B. (2003), “Stratégies des firmes et dynamiques territoriales”, in Dupuy,<br />
C. and Burmeister, A. and al. (2003), Entreprises et territoires, les nouveaux enjeux de la proximité,<br />
Paris, La documentation Française.<br />
Porter, M. (1990), The Competitive Advantage of Nations, London & Basingstoke: Macmillan.<br />
Savatier, J. (2007), “L’innovation et l’anticipation des mutations économiques et sociales : perspectives<br />
européenne”, in “Innovation et anticipation des mutations économiques et sociales”, Seminar<br />
organized by the European Commission, Diact and DGEFP, Bordeaux, 22-24 October 2007.<br />
Samson, I. (2008), L’économie contemporaine en 10 leçons, Dalloz.<br />
Schmidt, D. (2004), “Le partenariat euro-méditerranéen : une entreprise inachevée”, In Questions<br />
internationales n°10, Le Maghreb, La Documentation française; November-December 2004.<br />
Thoenig, J-C. and Waldman, C. (2005), De l’entreprise marchande à l’entreprise marquante, Editions<br />
d’Organisation.<br />
Zara, O. (2005), Le management de l’intelligence collective : vers une nouvelle gouvernance, M2<br />
éditions.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 30 March 2009<br />
Accepted: 19 October 2009
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
The Analysis of Long Run Growth Oriented Fiscal Policy<br />
Erős Adrienn * , University of Miskolc, Institute of Economic Theory, Miskolc, Hungary<br />
UDC: 336.02(439);(415) JEL: H3; N14<br />
ABSTRACT - One of the most debated questions of growth theory is whether or not government<br />
policies can be used to influence the long run growth rate of the economy. Neoclassical theory states<br />
economic policy actions can only have short run effects on the growth rate of the economy, but it can’t<br />
change the long run perspectives for growth.<br />
Endogenous growth theory integrated (among several other factors) fiscal policy to the growth<br />
models, enabling it to influence long run growth performance. According to these theories some<br />
elements of the government budget have positive effects on the long run growth rate of the economy<br />
(productive expenditures, and budget balance), while others are neutral (non-distortionary taxation<br />
and unproductive expenditures), or have negative consequences for growth (distortionary taxation).<br />
In my paper I summarize the theoretical and empirical literature of the relationship between fiscal<br />
policy and long run economic growth shortly. Then I continue my work with using the parameter<br />
estimates of a third generation study of developed countries (which considers the budget constraint as<br />
well) to evaluate the fiscal policy actions taken in Hungary and in Ireland, concentrating on the<br />
overall long run trends in the last one and a half decade. I will try to give explanation for the<br />
differences in the two countries’ reactions to some of the similar fiscal policy changes mapped during<br />
my research.<br />
KEY WORDS: fiscal policy, economic growth, Hungary, Ireland<br />
Review of the research topic<br />
The most important aim of economic policy is to ensure the highest level and most<br />
general welfare possible to the citizens of a country. There can be no other way to improve<br />
welfare over the long run but stimulating intense and sustainable economic growth. That is<br />
why the analysis of economic growth is a central question in the theory of economic policy,<br />
macro- and international economics.<br />
„Even small differences in long-term growth rates when cumulated over a generation or<br />
more, have much greater consequences for standards of living than the kinds of short-term<br />
business fluctuations that have typically occupied most of the attention of macroeconomists.<br />
To put it another way, if we can learn about government policy options that have even small<br />
effects on the long-term growth rate, then we can contribute much more to improvements in<br />
standards of living than has been provided by the entire history of macroeconomic analysis<br />
of countercyclical policy and fine-tuning. Economic growth is the part of macroeconomics<br />
that really matters.” [Barro – Sala-i-Martin (1995) 4-5 pp.]<br />
*<br />
Tel: +36 / 46 / 565-111 / 18-71, mob: +36 / 20 / 34-27-486, fax: +36 / 46 / 565-194, e-mail: geteros@unimiskolc.hu
26<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />
The above cited words perplexed me, when I first read them. I found their message a bit<br />
exaggerated, showing the self-consciousness of the researcher, his preference of his own<br />
interest. Still they made me think about the question. The more I thought about their<br />
veracity, the more I had to admit they are right. I think the matter of long run economic<br />
growth is of major importance. It is a stressful and timely problem from Hungary’s point of<br />
view, as after our accession to the European Union, convergence got into the focus of<br />
attention. Hungary’s per capita GDP, based on purchasing power parities did not reach even<br />
half of that of 25 member European Union’s average a decade ago (in 1997 it was only 49,5%<br />
of that, Eurostat), and even in this year, in 2007 it reaches only 64,5% of the EU average.<br />
We are facing a long period of convergence, based on these data. It is a highly logical<br />
question to ask what we can do to improve the pace of economic growth. This question<br />
belongs to the field of economic policy (among others) as well. I chose to study the fiscal<br />
instruments’ possible effects on long run economic growth in my research. I had three<br />
reasons to make this choice. On the one hand, the literature of economic growth theory<br />
focuses on fiscal policy’s growth effects, while on the other hand monetary policy (as we<br />
hope) will be lost as a national policy instrument after accessing the Euro-zone. This means<br />
the only policy left at our disposal to influence economic activities (among them economic<br />
growth) will be fiscal policy. My third reason was that before this research I was concerned<br />
with taxation matters and international tax harmonization so fiscal policy was familiar to me.<br />
I chose Ireland as a reference country, because she proved in the last two decades with her<br />
outstanding economic performance that convergence is not just a dream, and that economic<br />
policy (if properly done) can contribute to the pace of economic growth.<br />
Research background and methodology<br />
During the empirical work (arising from the macroeconomic characteristics of the theme)<br />
I made my calculations based on data taken from different international statistical databases.<br />
The main (but not the only) source of the data I used was the SourceOECD on-line statistical<br />
database. In order to ensure comparability, I endeavoured to minimize the types of databases<br />
used. Because of the methodological differences sustained by Hungary till 1997 distinct data<br />
are not published for Hungary in international databases. So in the case of those variables I<br />
had to rely on the data of the KSH (Central Statistics Office of Hungary), and PM ÁPMSO -<br />
ÁHIR (Hungarian Finance Ministry’s database).<br />
In my empirical work I analysed the relevant fiscal variables by using SPSS 14.0 and<br />
EViews 4.1. software.<br />
Empirical analysis<br />
The question dealt with in the paper is whether there is correlation, and if yes, how<br />
strong it is, between the long run growth rate of the economy and fiscal policy. Arguments<br />
can often be heard that economic policy is almighty, and the state can do anything. Other<br />
experts tend to stress that the state should not involve in economic affairs and its influence<br />
on economy ought to be minimized. Others add that the major aim should be (if economy<br />
evolved in such a way that state’s involvement in the economy, and mixed economy can be
Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 27<br />
considered as natural) the maintenance of budget balance and the confine of state’s debt as a<br />
share of GDP.<br />
According to neoclassical growth theory, long run economic growth can be contributed<br />
to two exogenous factors, technological progress and the growth rate of economically active<br />
population. This attitude leaves only limited, short run, temporary effect for fiscal policy on<br />
the growth rate of the economy even though it is capable of changing the achieved level of<br />
welfare permanently. Endogenous growth theory on the other hand states that fiscal policy<br />
can influence the long run growth rate of the economy as well. The most recent, third<br />
generation empirical studies based on the endogenous theory of growth use several groups<br />
of variables which can either contribute to the growth rate (like productive expenditure,<br />
budget balance), or be neutral to growth (like non-distortionary taxation and unproductive<br />
expenditure), or harm growth (like distortionary taxation). Those revenue sources and<br />
expenditure types, which have ambiguous growth effect, are called other revenues and other<br />
expenditure.<br />
According to our hypothesis there is correlation among these fiscal variables and the long<br />
run growth rate of the economy, and these correlations meet the expectations concluded by<br />
surveying the relevant theoretical and empirical literature both in their strength and in their<br />
directions.<br />
Based on the correlation and regression calculations made it can be concluded that the<br />
calculated results meet our expectations based on the survey of the theoretical and empirical<br />
literature in the case of most fiscal variables, even though there are some exceptions. Both the<br />
indicators used to measure the extent of the state as a share of GDP (the ratio of income<br />
centralisation and the ratio of redistribution) are negatively correlated with long run growth<br />
rate of the economy in both countries. This relationship is known as scale-effect in the<br />
literature of endogenous growth theory, and its existence can be confirmed in case of the<br />
analysed countries.<br />
The ratio to GDP of distortionary taxation is negatively related with the growth rate of<br />
the economy in both countries, which tendency meets our expectations formed when<br />
surveying the theoretical and empirical literature of growth.<br />
The share of non-distortionary taxation to GDP is not significantly correlated with<br />
growth based on Irish data, which trend coincides with our theoretical cognition. At the<br />
same time, Hungarian data show a reverse relationship, showing significant positive<br />
correlation between the two variables. The most probable reason for this is the increase in the<br />
share of non-distortionary taxation within the generally shrinking tax wedge, while decrease<br />
in the share of distortionary taxation is positively related with growth. The increase of the<br />
ratio of non-distortionary taxation to revenue enhances growth based on both countries’<br />
data, which result meets our expectations.<br />
Productive expenditure as a share of GDP is not significantly related with the growth rate<br />
of the economy based on Irish data (this results meets our expectations), while according to<br />
Hungarian data the two variables correlate negatively. This contradicts the finding of<br />
theoretical and empirical literature, and the reason for it must lay in the parallel changes<br />
occurred in the structure and extension of the budget as a share of GDP. The ratio of public<br />
expenditure to GDP decreased by 8 percentage points during the period in question, while<br />
productive expenditure as a share of GDP fall back only by 2 percentage points, so their
28<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />
share of all expenses rose by 2 percentage points. The decrease of productive expenditure’s<br />
ratio to GDP must rather have been parallel in time to the rise of the growth rate than being<br />
the reason for it.<br />
The share of unproductive expenditure in GDP is not significantly correlated with the<br />
long run growth rate of the economy in Ireland, in accordance with the predictions of the<br />
third generation studies. In Hungary significant negative relation can be found between the<br />
two variables. This suits the findings of certain second generation studies, showing negative<br />
relation between the extension of transfer programmes and the long run growth rate of the<br />
economy.<br />
The ratio of budget balance to GDP relates positively with the long run growth rate of the<br />
economy according to all types of empirical studies. This statement can be confirmed both in<br />
the case of Hungary and Ireland, showing significant positive correlation between the two<br />
variables. Two measures were used to characterise the relationship between long run<br />
economic growth and state debt. Three and five year averages of state debt’s share in GDP<br />
relate significantly negatively with growth in both countries. Three and five year average<br />
change in state debt is in significant negative correlation with the long run growth rate of the<br />
economy. These results meet our expectations formed when surveying the theoretical and<br />
empirical literature.<br />
Our conjuncture is that Ireland forewent the previous leaded states. What can the<br />
enviable success of Ireland be attributed to? Several possible reasons, like aptitudes<br />
(geographical position, English mother tongue, a young population unmatched in developed<br />
countries) economic history (doubling of the EU funds, Single European Market), and<br />
economic development (globalisation, foreign direct investment, change in the importance of<br />
distance, revolution of the IT systems) are mentioned in literature. Many of the experts stress<br />
the importance of economic policy actions (tax system and industrial policy aiming to attract<br />
FDI, activities of enterprise agencies, reform of the system of education, partnership<br />
agreements securing a low wage level for a long period of time). We think additionally to<br />
what has been mentioned the role of certain political and cultural factors, economic and<br />
social sacrifices made for success are worth attention as well. Fast convergence is due to<br />
several factors.<br />
According to our analysis a possible explanation of the “Irish economic miracle” can be<br />
conditional convergence. The two known forms of transition paths (delayed convergence,<br />
which occurs due to the elimination of barriers to growth and imitation based on adaptation<br />
of more developed, more productive technology) strengthened each-other, and three<br />
beneficial external factors’ synergic effect (doubling of the EU Funds, European Single<br />
Market and a long boom of the US economy) made the convergence so fast and dynamic.<br />
We can conclude convergence has happened in Ireland. Further strengthening of her<br />
economic position (foregoing the present leader states) requires her to take part in<br />
developing new technologies. The country is committed to this and R&D expenses have been<br />
increased seriously even in real terms. Irish enterprise agencies have noticed that their<br />
strategy needs to be reformed, as competition for international capital escalated and Ireland’s<br />
traditional competitive advantages, low wages and low taxes are not unique in the EU<br />
anymore, and after the new member states in Eastern Europe accessed the Union. New<br />
strategic directions were appointed in 2004; the aim is to form new clusters in high value
Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 29<br />
added sectors and internationally tradable services. Most of the selected industries have<br />
antecedents in the country and the necessary regulations are being formed now. Based on<br />
these facts we can conclude that Ireland does not rest in her laurels but takes any steps she<br />
can in order to maintain her dynamic growth.<br />
According to economic data Ireland’s convergence is so successful that she has already<br />
foregone almost all her competitors with respect to per capita real GDP based on purchasing<br />
power parity (she has foregone most of her EU-member concurrent during 1997-1998, since<br />
2001 only the performance of Norway, Luxembourg and the USA is higher than Ireland’s).<br />
Convergence has been finished in Ireland, moreover, she has even foregone the previous<br />
leaders (those member states of the European Union whose economic performance was<br />
better than hers), and we have witnessed the rare phenomena of leapfrogging in Ireland’s<br />
case.<br />
As we have seen, the direction of the correlation between fiscal variables and the growth<br />
rate are the same in each variable’s case in both countries. At the same time, according to our<br />
hypothesis the decrease of government sector as a share of GDP (and any other budgetary<br />
variables) can not be unrestricted; the pace of growth can not be dynamized by this<br />
endlessly. This conjecture of us is strengthened by the fact that underlying processes in the<br />
two analysed countries differ. During the analyses of the correlation between most of the<br />
fiscal variables and the long run growth rate of the economy we discovered an important<br />
statutory. We found a negative relation between the certain fiscal factors and the long run<br />
growth rate of the economy in both countries’ case during correlation calculations, but when<br />
estimating regression equations we experienced that negative correlation is unambiguous<br />
based on Hungarian data, but to Irish data parabolic regression functions can be fitted in<br />
most cases (there are some exemptions like social security contributions, health and<br />
productive expenditure). In the case of all the other variables we can conclude that the right<br />
hand leg of the Irish parabolic function can be regarded as the continuation of the negative<br />
regression fitted to Hungarian data.<br />
This finding can be originated in two reasons. On the one hand, Hungarian government’s<br />
extension as a share of GDP is higher, than the Irish one. For example, the ratio of<br />
government expenses to GDP shrunken from 45,3% to 31,5% in Ireland during the period in<br />
question, while in Hungary it fall back from 63,44% to 47,4%, so it is still much higher, than<br />
the original level of Ireland used to be in 1990. Similar tendencies show in the other possible<br />
measure of government’s extension, government revenues’ share in GDP.<br />
On the other hand, another possible explanation for the divergence in the behaviour of<br />
the two countries can be the different situation the two countries are in on their transition<br />
paths. Ireland stepped on a transition path around 1987. During the twenty years passed,<br />
convergence finished and even more, we witness the rare case of leapfrogging. Hungary is in<br />
quite a different situation after the changing of the Regime [Erdős (2003) 294 p.], she is on a<br />
transition path as well, but her path is very different from that of Ireland’s and her lag from<br />
the leaders is still very large. The gap is closing from year to year, still, even in 2007 we only<br />
achieve 64,5% of the 25 member EU member states’ average per capita GDP based on<br />
purchasing power parity. Hungary still has a long convergence period to go through. That is<br />
why we do not have to expect the tendencies to turn for a long period of time, which means
30<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />
that the advices given by growth theory are worth considering in Hungary’s case, based on<br />
Irelands recent past.<br />
In our opinion Irish fiscal policy contributes to the slow pace of the necessary fallback in<br />
the growth rate at the end of the transition path. The existence of conditional convergence is<br />
strengthened by the fact that the pace of economic growth has been slowing in Ireland in the<br />
recent past. At the same time, we must consider that the present, relatively slower growth is<br />
still enviable to most developed countries. It can only be called slow after the outstandingly<br />
high growth rate experienced from 1987 to 2001. Convergence (as we have already discussed<br />
above) has been enhanced by several fiscal and non-fiscal measures in Ireland. Based on the<br />
above analysis we can unequivocally conclude that the radical reform of fiscal policy<br />
contributed to the evolution of “Irish economic miracle”, or the “Celtic Tiger” phenomena.<br />
Figure 1. Long run growth rate of the economy as a function of the share of government<br />
revenue to GDP in Hungary and in Ireland<br />
Government revenue as a share of GDP<br />
(Moving average)<br />
Source: own representation<br />
Source of data used: SourceOECD<br />
Consistent shrinking of the government’s extension as a share of GDP, maintenance of<br />
the budget balance and the decrease of the ratio of state debt to GDP (which the fast growth<br />
of GDP used as benchmark also contributed to, of course) eventuated the result anticipated<br />
by growth theory, and even contributes to the evolution of the still very favourable (even<br />
though slowing) pace of economic growth. We endeavoured to strengthen this result by<br />
using the parameter estimates of a third generation empirical study as well. The analysis<br />
performed by the model confirmed recent year’s fiscal policy’s beneficial effects on the<br />
growth rate of the economy. Our findings show that after the millennium, as the growth rate
Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 31<br />
started falling back in Ireland, fiscal policy contributed to the relatively slower decrease of<br />
the growth rate which is statutory at the end of the transition path.<br />
Hungary is under pressure in forming her fiscal policy today, the most important task is<br />
(beyond growth aspects we are required to meet the Maastricht criteria as well) to restore the<br />
balance of the budget. Fiscal consolidation in Hungary started only about a year ago, so it<br />
would be quite early to evaluate the long run effects of these policy actions now.<br />
Hungarian tax wedge can be considered as averagely high compared to other EU<br />
member states (Hungarian tax wedge is 39,2% of our GDP, while the average of the 25 EU<br />
member states is 40,7%). Even though compared to other recently accessed member states<br />
(their average is 35,2%) and to the Irish tax wedge (31,7%) it is quite high. [Eurostat, ISSN<br />
4020-4298] This means we have enough space to shrink the share of tax revenue to GDP,<br />
which would be beneficial to growth according to our analysis. According to these findings,<br />
from a growth oriented point of view we should rather decrease government expenses in<br />
order to restore budget balance, than increase government revenues.<br />
Opposite to the expansive trends of Irish fiscal policy in the 1970’s, the change in fiscal<br />
policy’s direction, a gradual shrinking of the budget’s extension as a share of GDP, which<br />
started at the end of the 1980’s contributed to the evolution of the „Celtic Tiger” phenomena.<br />
According to our hypothesis it is not enough to concentrate generally on the decrease of<br />
government activity’s level as a share of GDP. Structure of the budget plays at least as an<br />
important role in forming growth performance.<br />
To prove our assumption we used the parameter estimates of the already mentioned<br />
third generation endogenous Bleaney-Gemmel-Kneller model. The two countries we analyse<br />
represent too small a sample to calculate our own parameter-estimates based on them. But as<br />
both are developed countries (OECD member states) we found the study’s results (based on<br />
OECD member states’ sample) relevant for the countries in question. Authors of the study<br />
(out of the seven fiscal variables they included in their research) found significant effects of<br />
three fiscal variables on long run economic growth:<br />
• The ratio of distortionary taxation to GDP, which they attributed negative growth<br />
effects to based on the original model of Barro’s (1988);<br />
• The ratio of productive expenditure to GDP, which turns up with positive growth<br />
effects (again, in accordance with the model of Barro), and<br />
• The ratio of budget balance to GDP (which, again meeting our expectations formed<br />
when surveying theoretical and empirical literature) has a positive coefficient the<br />
regression equation.<br />
These three relevant factors influence the complex effect of fiscal policy actions on the<br />
pace of economic growth with different weights, calculated in the third generation empirical<br />
study. When evaluating the long run growth effects of Irish and Hungarian fiscal policies by<br />
using the parameter-estimates of the Bleaney-Gemmel-Kneller model we concluded that<br />
productive expenditure plays a major role in shaping the overall growth effect of fiscal<br />
policy. This was the most obtrusive in the case of Ireland, where the decrease in the ratio of<br />
productive expenditure to GDP meant the main growth impulse since 2000 (since the pace of<br />
economic growth started slowing).<br />
In Hungary, the dominant element in shaping the favourable long run growth effect of<br />
fiscal policy changes was the gradual decrease of the ratio of distortionary taxation to GDP.
32<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 25-33)<br />
At the same time we have to consider the increase in the ratio of productive expenditure to<br />
GDP in the second part of the time-period, after the years of the Bokros-package, which<br />
enhanced growth significantly. We calculated a neutral growth effect for the Bokros-Package<br />
by using parameter estimates of the third generation study. This can be attributed to the fact<br />
that the positive effect evolving from the improvement of budget balance and the decrease in<br />
the share of distortionary taxation to GDP was fully outweighed by the negative effect of the<br />
decrease in productive expenditure’s share in GDP. The dominant element again (we have to<br />
stress, just like in the case of Ireland) was the decrease in the ratio of productive expenditure<br />
to GDP.<br />
Altogether, we wished to demonstrate and strengthen with our analysis that adequately<br />
adopted fiscal policy actions are capable of enhancing the long run growth rate of the<br />
economy. Restoration of the budget balance and gradual (but not unlimited) shrinking of<br />
government’s extension as a share of GDP are needed in order to achieve the aimed effect At<br />
the same time we must not forget the importance of the structure of revenues and<br />
expenditure. Reduction of the government expenditure should be done by decreasing<br />
unproductive expenditure (as those are neutral to growth). Productive expenditure (which<br />
enhances growth as we have stated above) should be maintained.<br />
References<br />
Barro, R. J. (1988) Government Spending in a Simple Model of Endogenous Growth. National Bureau<br />
of Economic Research Working Paper No. 2588<br />
Barro, R. J. (1989a) A Cross-Country Study of Growth, Saving and Government. National Bureau of<br />
Economic Research Working Paper No. 2855<br />
Barro, R. J. - Sala-i-Martin, X. (1990) Public Finance in Models of Economic Growth. National Bureau<br />
of Economic Research Working Paper No. 3362.<br />
Barro, R. J. (1993) Economic Growth and Convergence. Occasional Papers number 46. ISBN 1-55815-<br />
283-0<br />
Barro, R. J. – Sala-i-Martin, X. (1995) Economic Growth. MacGraw-Hill, Inc. ISBN 0-07-003697-7<br />
Barro, R. J. (2005) A gazdasági növekedést meghatározó tényezők. Nemzeti Tankönyvkiadó, Budapest<br />
(Determinants of Economic Growth. A Cross-Country Empirical Study. 1997. MIT Press)<br />
Bleaney, M. – Gemmel, N. – Kneller, R. (2000) Testing the Endogenous Growth Model: Public<br />
Expenditure, Taxation and Growth over the Long-Run. University of Nottingham Discussion<br />
Papers in Economic No. 00/25. (ISSN 1360-2438)<br />
Easterly, W. – Rebelo, S. (1993) Fiscal Policy and Economic Growth: An Empirical Investigation.<br />
National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 4499.<br />
Engen, E. M. – Skinner, J. (1992) Fiscal Policy and Economic Growth. National Bureau of Economic<br />
Research Working Paper No. 4223.<br />
Engen , E. M. – Skinner, J. (1996) Taxation and Economic Growth. National Bureau of Economic<br />
Research Working Paper No. 5826.<br />
Erdős Tibor (2003) Fenntartható gazdasági növekedés. Akadémiai Kiadó, Budapest ISBN 963 05 8078 0<br />
Eurostat, Statistics in Focus: Tax Revenue in the EU. (2006/2) ISSN 4020-4298<br />
Fölster, S. – Henrekson, M. (2000) Growth Effects of Government Expenditure and Taxation in Rich<br />
Countries. European Economic Review (forthcoming)<br />
Gemmel, N. (2001) Fiscal Policy in a Growth Framework. World Institute for Development Economics<br />
Research Discussion Paper No. 2001/84
Erös, A., The Analysis of Long Run Growth, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 25-33) 33<br />
Gemmel, N. – Kneller, R. (2003) Fiscal Policy, Growth and Convergence in Europe. New Zealand<br />
Treasury Working Paper 03/14 2003. jún.<br />
Gemmel, N. – Kneller, R. – Sanz, I. (2006) Fiscal Policy Impacts on Growth in the OECD: Are They<br />
Long- or Short-Run? (forthcoming)<br />
Howitt, P. (2006) Endogenous Growth. Article prepared for the new Palgrave Dictionary of<br />
Economics, 2nd Edition, ed. Steven Durlauf and Lawrence Blume<br />
Jánossy, F. (1966) A gazdasági fejlődés trendvonala és a helyreállítási periódusok. Közgazdasági és<br />
Jogi Kiadó, Budapest.<br />
King, R. G. – Rebelo, S. (1990) Public Policy and Economic Growth: Developing Neoclassical<br />
Implications. National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 3338.<br />
Kneller, R. (2000) The Implications of the Comprehensive Spending review for the Long-Run Growth<br />
Rate: A view from the Literature. National Institute Economic Review, 2000. 171. 94-105. pp<br />
Kneller, R. – Bleaney, M. – Gemmel, N. (1998) Growth, Public Policy and the Government Budget<br />
Constraint: Evidence from OECD Countries. University of Nottongham, School of Economics<br />
Discussion Paper No. 98/14.<br />
Mellár, T. (2001) Kedvezményezett vagy áldozat: a GDP és a költségvetési kiadások kapcsolata.<br />
Statisztikai Szemle, 79. évf. 2001. 7. szám 573-586. old.<br />
Mendoza, E. G. – Milesi-Ferretti, G. M. – Asea, P. (1997) On the Ineffectiveness of Tax Policy in<br />
Altering Long-Run Growth: Harberger’s Superneutrality Conjecture. <strong>Journal</strong> of Public Economics<br />
66. pp. 99-126<br />
Musgrave, R. A. – Musgrave, P. B. (1989) Public Finance in Theory and Practice (international edition)<br />
McGraw and Hill, ISBN 0-07-0441278<br />
Romer, P. M. (1989) Human Capital and Growth. National Bureau of Economic Research Working<br />
Paper No. 3173<br />
Roubini, N. – Milesi-Ferretti G. M. (1994) Taxation and Endogenous Growth in Open Economies. .<br />
National Bureau of Economic Research Working Paper No. 4881.<br />
Sala-i-Martin, X. (2002) 15 <strong>Year</strong>s of New Economics: What Have We Learnt? Columbia University,<br />
Department of Economics, Discussion Paper Series #0102-47<br />
Stiglitz, J. E. (2000) A kormányzati szektor gazdaságtana. KJK-Kerszöv. ISBN 963 224 560 1<br />
Tanzi, V. – Schuknecht, L. (2003) Public Finances and Economic Growth in European Countries.<br />
Prepared for the Conference on „Fostering Economic Growth in Europe”, Vienna June 12-13, 2003.<br />
Vigvári, A. (2005) Közpénzügyeink. KJK Kerszöv. ISBN 963 224 863 5<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 7 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 16 March 2010
ORIGINAL SCIENFITIC PAPER<br />
Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers in the Central-<br />
East Europe Region in Comparison with Developed Countries<br />
Tej Jakub * , Ekonomická fakulta TUKE, Košice, Slovakia<br />
UDC: 336.7(4) JEL: G15; E44; G34<br />
ABSTRACT – My intention is to clarify the process of merging from the economic point of view,<br />
especially impact on financial results after the merger itself. Examine and analyze differences in<br />
financial results, measured by using various ratio indicators, market value of shares and capital<br />
adequacy in the region of Central and Eastern Europe in comparison with developed markets in the<br />
world.<br />
KEY WORDS: economic situation, merger, the indicators of profitability, market value of shares,<br />
capital adequacy<br />
Introduction<br />
Nineties was characterized by a large number of mergers and acquisitions worldwide.<br />
This phenomenon belongs in the past decades to the preferred part of economic theory and<br />
practice. By the volume of capital bank mergers and acquisitions belong to highest rank of<br />
operations. They are closely linked with the globalization process and thanks to it very often<br />
cross national borders. Economic assumptions of mergers wave in last decade is the rapid<br />
development of information technology, reducing the cost of communication and transport,<br />
markets deregulation and privatization. In particular, acquisitions are an integral part of the<br />
restructuring process in transition economies.<br />
Merger itself has not always met planned expectations. There is no guarantee of<br />
achieving economies of scale, risk diversification and improvement of solvency. To fulfill all<br />
positive effects, it is necessary to prepare in advance more than just a basic plan and strategy.<br />
It is necessary to include regional specificities and all other relevant variables.<br />
Material and method<br />
The intention of article is to clarify the processes of mergers from an economic<br />
perspective and impact on financial results after the merger itself. Based on data from annual<br />
reports, it examines and analyzes the impact of mergers on banksʹ financial results, measured<br />
by various ratios or market value of shares and capital adequacy in the region of Central and<br />
Eastern Europe in comparison with developed markets in the world.<br />
*<br />
Address: Boženy Němcovej 32, Košice, Slovakia, e-mail: jakub.tej@tuke.sk
Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 35<br />
Achievement and discussion<br />
Merger usually means the process of merging two or more separate economic entities,<br />
which occurs through direct connection to their net assets. The merger, in most cases means<br />
the merger of relatively strong and equally important subjects, which is reflected in many<br />
aspects. The merger must be decided by the General Assembly of all participating<br />
companies. As arguments for mergers and acquisitions is tend to be given many reasons.<br />
Separations of reasons in favor of the merger and against them are widely various, and what<br />
some studies have considered clearly positive, others resolutely refuse. As an example, we<br />
can use the impact of mergers on employment and the expected impact of mergers on the<br />
effectiveness of the newly created bank. But the problem remains that many mergers are<br />
justified economically inefficient. Analysis shows that the main problem is merging different<br />
corporate culture of companies. Only few projects, of mergers and acquisitions have more<br />
than a basic plan how to solve this problem. Others fail because of incorrect valuation of<br />
assets or hidden liabilities of the company [5, p. 243].<br />
Complicated structure of conglomerates, which occur after the merger, very often<br />
requires more administrative personnel. The preserved remains specialized, however often<br />
mutually competing departments. On the other hand are after mergers and acquisitions<br />
expected savings from reductions in staff or expenses costs (Table. 1). These benefits would<br />
mean social costs in terms of increased unemployment. The problem in terms of social costs<br />
is also closing branches, usually associated with reducing supply of banking services, job<br />
cuts may not be the rule.<br />
Table 1. Estimates of cost savings in bank mergers (in% of total costs)<br />
SBC-UBS 23<br />
Bank of Scotland-NatWest 22<br />
Bank Austria-Credit Anstalt 18<br />
BankAmerika-SecPac 17<br />
Wells-First Interstate 17<br />
Chemical-Chase 16<br />
Swedbank-Forenings 15<br />
Lloyds-Midland 14<br />
Vereinsbank-Hypobank 14<br />
Fortis-Generale 11<br />
Source: Davis, S. I. 2007 [2, p. 97]<br />
The most important argument for the merger is synergy. Synergistic effect is based on the<br />
premise that combining two formerly separate companies involves an increase effect on the<br />
coupling value that is added to the sum of the merging companies. It is known that such<br />
effects arise when combining two companies, for example, that in newly established<br />
company arise economies of scale, reduce some costs, lower distribution costs and marketing<br />
costs, disposal of surplus or unused assets, or just using them. We can say that the 90th were<br />
synergies reason and argument of many mergers in the financial sector. Acquisition of a
36<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />
major market positions, or the emergence of oligopoly or even monopoly, should be reflected<br />
in the growth of the value of the bank and decrease the value of competing banks - however<br />
most of the studies decrease the value of rival banks didn’t demonstrate [1, p. 135].<br />
The motive for mergers and acquisitions may also be to circumvent quotas, tariffs and<br />
other restrictions in foreign trade, reduce dependence on foreign trade or invest in a safe and<br />
predictable environment. For successfully manage of merger is very important to make<br />
valuation of both banks, which want to merge. Financial valuation of bank aims to make its<br />
value by a sum of money. The potential of bank is then evaluate by cash equivalents.<br />
Valuation methods can be divided into these main groups [4, p. 12-13]:<br />
1. methods based on income analysis,<br />
2. methods based primarily on an analysis of current market prices,<br />
3. valuation methods based on cost (the cost of purchasing the property).<br />
Researched bank mergers were divided into groups according to the region in which they<br />
took place. The first group included the mergers in developed economies such as Japan,<br />
USA, GB, Spain and Republic of South Africa.<br />
The second group included mergers acquisitions in transition economies of Central and<br />
Eastern Europe. The oldest is the acquisition of CSOB by Belgian KBC in 1999 in the Czech<br />
Republic. In it, KBC has acquired 65.69% stake for 40 billion CZK. Followed by series of<br />
Austrian ErsteBank acquisitions in the Czech Republic, Slovakia and Romania. The other<br />
from region are the acquisition of Komerční banka by French Societe Generale in 2001 in the<br />
Czech Republic, where there was a transfer of 60% of the shares for 40 billion CZK and fresh<br />
UniBanka merger with HVB Bank in Slovakia in 2007.<br />
Table 2. The value of mergers under the merged total assets (EUR million)<br />
Merging banks Total assets Total<br />
Mitsubishi Tokyo FG + UFJ Holdings 2005 (Japan) 779 338 593 396 1 372 734<br />
JP Morgan Chase + Bank One 2004 (USA) 955 077 269 512 1 224 589<br />
Sumitomo + Sakura Bank 2001 (Japan) 500 886 414 775 915 661<br />
Royal Bank of Scotland + NatWest 2000 (GB) 532 455 309 873 842 328<br />
Barclays + ABSA 2005 (JAR) 785 852 51 009 836 861<br />
Santander + Abbey 2004 (Spain) 504 704 248 857 753 561<br />
SG + KB 2001 (Czech) 512 500 12 175 524 675<br />
ErsteG + BCR 2006 (Romania) 181 703 13 519 195 222<br />
KBC + CSOB 1999 (Czech) 156 218 6 557 162 775<br />
ErsteG + SS 2001 (Slovakia) 80 114 4 643 84 757<br />
ErsteG + CS 2000 (Czech) 54 935 12 410 67 345<br />
UniBanka +HVB Bank 2007 (Slovakia) 1 504 2 178 3 682<br />
Capital adequacy<br />
Source: own calculations based on annual reports of banks<br />
Sense of capital adequacy is based on the assumption that the larger the capital of<br />
financial institutions, the more resources shareholders put in. And the greater will be their
Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 37<br />
interest for the proper operation of the institution not to lose this money, but to maximize<br />
their value.<br />
Graph 1. Capital adequacy ratio (%)<br />
16<br />
15<br />
14<br />
13<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
Source: author<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries<br />
In case of problems means lower value of capital adequacy for the shareholders and<br />
depositors a higher probability of loss. When bank will be successful in its activities, the<br />
lower value of the capital adequacy means for shareholders higher probability of evaluation<br />
invested investments, but for clients only their deposit interest. Raising capital adequacy<br />
means better security for clients, but on the other hand it means a reduction in institutions<br />
profit contributing to the unit of capital [9, p. 195].<br />
From the previous graph 1 captivate an increase in capital adequacy of banks from<br />
Central and Eastern Europe. This can be explained by the some restructuring and reducing<br />
the risk before merger, or consistent acquisition partner selection. However, the level of the<br />
years after the merger seems to be overly cautious, since the recommended minimum<br />
threshold is at 8%. Conversely, banks from developed world economies reported relatively<br />
stable levels without significant trends at around 12%.<br />
Profitability ratio indicators<br />
From all of profitability indicators, each of which focuses on a different type of<br />
profitability, was included in the analysis one of representative from each category.<br />
Representations of the course are also most worldwide prevalent ROE and ROA.<br />
Graph 2. shows the development of Bank’s profitability ratio indicator R1 (net banking<br />
product * 100/ bankʹs business income) three years prior to the merger till period of three<br />
years after the merger. It is clearly visible that the group of banks from Central and Eastern<br />
Europe after the merger increased the share of net banking product up to 75%. In the second<br />
group of banks throughout the whole period a clear downward trend with small stagnation
38<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />
in mergerʹs year, which means focusing on other areas, mainly on income from fees and<br />
commissions, or profits from financial operations.<br />
Graph 2. Bank’s profitability ratio indicator R1<br />
80<br />
70<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of merger 1 2 3<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
developed countries<br />
Source: author<br />
Graph 3. Bank’s profitability ratio indicator R3<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
Source: author<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries<br />
R3 indicator works with net profit before tax (R3 = net profit before tax * 100 / bankʹs<br />
business income + operating income + other income) and thus eliminates any tax differentials<br />
in all countries. Already one year before the merger can be seen profit growth in both groups<br />
of banks, which continued also in subsequent years. So this indicator describes the merger as<br />
a great way how to increase net profit before tax.
Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 39<br />
Graph 4. Personal profitability R4<br />
500<br />
450<br />
400<br />
350<br />
300<br />
250<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
Source: author<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries<br />
Personal profitability ratio shows the effect which brings unit of labour in proportion to<br />
net banking product (graph 4). In international comparisons it is necessary to use net profit<br />
before tax due to different levels of taxation in different countries, and also apply profit to<br />
one employee. This comparison may indicate overstaffed banks or not very successful<br />
interbank organization, poor levels of technical equipment or in the extreme case low skilled<br />
and expertise of employees. Optimization of branch network and reducing the number of<br />
employees is among the core theme of mergers. One might assume that after the merger it<br />
comes just increase of this parameter. However, in a group of banks from Central and<br />
Eastern Europe was no bigger increase acting, even in the merger year there was a slight<br />
decline. And since labor costs were not growing by way to be able to explain this trend,<br />
mergers in this direction had not brought the desired effect. Conversely group of banks from<br />
developed economies, recorded an increase to almost twice its value from the year before the<br />
merger and the trend seems to be strong enough also for the future.<br />
Graph 5. Return on equity – ROE<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
-10<br />
-20<br />
-30<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
Source: author<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries
40<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />
Graph 5. shows the performance of banks as measured by ROE. It indicates to<br />
shareholders how effective their investments in shares are. Visible is a positive increase in<br />
banks in Central and Eastern Europe. Already one year before the merger they reached a<br />
significant positive value and growth trend is maintained until the end of the period. By<br />
contrast the group of mergers in developed economies has value of ROE still in the range 10<br />
to 20% without significant changes in the mergerʹs year. Thus the merger did not bring any<br />
significant effect to shareholders in the long run.<br />
Graph 6. Return on assets – ROA<br />
1,2<br />
1,0<br />
0,8<br />
0,6<br />
0,4<br />
0,2<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
Source: author<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries<br />
The fundamental problem of the indicator ROE as the primary indicator of bank<br />
profitability, is that it does not take into account a possible leverage factor. The Bank may<br />
indeed very easily increase its ROE by increasing the total debt, namely use capital to cover a<br />
higher amount of assets. Therefore, the analysis must be considered simultaneously with the<br />
second indicator - ROA. Graph 6 - ROA shows how effectively assets are used to make a<br />
profit, then how much one unit of assets earns in average. The international standard is<br />
regarded as a value of 1.00 and as we can see, central European banks are reaching that point<br />
immediately one year after merger. In contrast with second group which are slightly below<br />
the standard and don’t exceed value of 0.8 throughout whole period of time. The following<br />
shape of curve caused Japanese banks and their long-lasting crisis in its banking sector,<br />
which is marked by huge credit losses and overcapacity.<br />
Market value indicator<br />
The most important indicator from this category is now considered the market price of<br />
shares, which immediately takes into account all relevant information affecting their level<br />
and is a very important tool for investors (graph 7).
Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 41<br />
Graph 7. Market price of shares<br />
200<br />
180<br />
160<br />
140<br />
120<br />
100<br />
80<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries<br />
Source: author<br />
Note except Slovenská sporiteľňa, BCR, HVB Bank and UNI Bank, which shares are not publicly traded.<br />
One year after the merger took place as expected, fall in central banks stock prices, but it<br />
was already deleted the next year and a year later, the average price reached 170% of the<br />
initial value. The curve of banks from developed economies has fall in mergerʹs year, but the<br />
following period was marked by a sharp strengthening price of shares up to 190% of initial<br />
value in the third year after the merger.<br />
Graph 8. Total loans / total assets ratio<br />
60<br />
55<br />
50<br />
45<br />
40<br />
35<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
Source: author<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries<br />
One of the most important indicator for financing small and medium-sized enterprises<br />
(SME) belongs the volume of total loans to total assets (graph 8). Which are in the banking<br />
practice divided in loans to households and small entrepreneurs, large corporate clients,<br />
special funding and loans to SMEʹs. Now we pay attention just to the last item which is drew<br />
in graph 9.
42<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 34-43)<br />
Graph 9. SME’s loans / total assets ratio<br />
16<br />
15<br />
14<br />
13<br />
12<br />
11<br />
10<br />
9<br />
-3 -2 -1 year of<br />
merger<br />
Central and Eastern Europe<br />
Source: author<br />
1 2 3<br />
developed countries<br />
The share of SMEʹs loans to total assets has a very similar trend as total loans to total<br />
assets. We can observe a significant trend of divergence in two groups since year before the<br />
merger, which is getting stronger every following year. Mergers in the our region didn’t<br />
contributed to a better allocation of loans for small and medium-sized enterprises, but<br />
commercial banks are now paying increasing attention to the segment of small and mediumsized<br />
enterprises [8]. Which do not provide such large volumes of transactions as large<br />
corporate customers, but better margins and future potential. This led in 2008 to increase of<br />
lending volume to this segment about the fifth, sometimes up to 30 %.<br />
Conclusion<br />
The success of the merger affects many factors. We could say most important are<br />
managing rationalization of operations, gaining access to new banking techniques,<br />
optimizing economies of scale, portfolio diversification, synergy, and not least the success of<br />
the merger determine choosing of financing method of the merger. Assessment of the merger<br />
success after several years of difficult, but most obvious way seems to be using different<br />
analytical methods and ratio indicators that can provide a fairly comprehensive view of<br />
economic performance following years after the merger compared to the years before the<br />
merger.<br />
All indicators should be monitored and assessed in longer period of time and it should be<br />
noted that even slight changes in the indicator level may indicate changes in the range of<br />
customers or changes in the financial market. The capital adequacy is showing some<br />
differences between merger groups. Central and Eastern Europe region in the second year<br />
after the merger amounted value exceeding 15 %, so although in the eyes of clients were<br />
more secure, on the other hand, this meant reduction in institutions profit contributing to the<br />
unit of capital. Profitability indicators also speak in favor of the merger in Central and<br />
Eastern Europe region. Mergers in our region didn’t contributed to a better allocation of
Tej, J., Economic Assessment of Selected Bank Mergers, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 34-43) 43<br />
loans for small and medium-sized enterprises, but commercial banks are now paying<br />
increasing attention to the segment of small and medium-sized enterprises.<br />
Better results of banks in transition countries in Central and Eastern Europe, is generally<br />
attributed to a significant restructuring and rationalization process, which took place before<br />
the merger itself to attract acquisition partners. To evaluate the impact of mergers on banksʹ<br />
financial results can be done not only with using these methods and indicators, but also in<br />
other ways.<br />
Summary<br />
The study gives an overview of the economic situation coupled with the merger of banks in the area<br />
of Central and Eastern Europe in comparison with developed markets in the world. It applies to<br />
different types of mergers of banks ratio indicators, the market value of shares and capital adequacy.<br />
Attention turns also to the issue of SMEʹs loans measured by the range of indicators.<br />
References<br />
BALÁŽ, P., VERČEK, P. Globalizácia a nová ekonomika. Bratislava: Sprint, 2002, s.135. ISBN 80-89085-06-<br />
7.<br />
DAVIS, S. I. Bank Mergers. Lessons for the Future. London: Macmillan 2000, s. 97. ISBN 978-0-312-23552-<br />
9.<br />
KOTULIČ, R., KIRÁLY, P., RAJČÍNIOVÁ, M. Finančná analýza podniku. Bratislava: Iura Edition, 2007. -<br />
206 s. - ISBN 978-80-8078-117-0.<br />
MAŘÍK, M. Určování hodnoty firem. 1. vyd. Praha: Ekopress, 1998, s. 12-13. ISBN 80-7079-938-2.<br />
POLOUČEK, S. Bankovnictví. 1. vyd. Karviná: SU v Opavě 2005, s. 243. ISBN 80-7248-264-5.<br />
POLOUČEK, S. a kol. Bankovnictví. 1. vydání. Praha: C. H. Beck, 2006, s. 490. ISBN 80-7179-462-7.<br />
RÁKOŠ, J. Základy finančnej analýzy. In: Manažment projektov v regiónoch. Prešov: Manacon, 2005, s.<br />
83-100. ISBN 80-89040-27-6.<br />
TEJ, J., BRECIK, M., KRASNODĘBSKI, A. Small and medium enterprise - one of the aspects of the regional<br />
development. In: Acta Agraria et Silvestria. Vol. XLIV/2: series agraria; sekcja ekonomiczna. -<br />
Kraków: Wydawnictwo Oddzialu Polskiej Akademii Nauk, 2005.<br />
TEJ, J. ml., TEJ, J. Ekonomické zhodnotenie fúzií vybraných bánk v regióne. In: ANNO 2009. Prešov: PU v<br />
Prešove 2009, s.191-202. Dostupné na: http://www.pulib.sk/elpub2/FM/Kotulic10/index.html, ISBN<br />
978-80-555-0005-8.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 11 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 23 March 2010
ORIGINAL SCIENFITIC PAPER<br />
Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping Method for the<br />
Term Structure of Interest Rates *<br />
Glova Jozef, Technical university of Košice, Faculty of Economics, Slovak Republic<br />
UDC: 336.781.5 JEL: C41, D35, G12<br />
ABSTRACT – This article focuses on the term structure of interest rates analysis in the form of a<br />
yield curve. The yield curve is a basic instrument for understanding the relationship between the price<br />
of money and the maturity of a financial instrument. It has the same relevance for all economic<br />
subjects in the form of a basic value determination. The term structure analysis can be used in<br />
different economic categories like financial management, portfolio management, actuary science,<br />
company valuation, management of firm value, financial risk management, etc. Such as basic method<br />
applied in the yield curve construction is the bootstrapping method. Unfortunately, there is great<br />
computing severity related to this method. Fortunately, however, the application of matrix theory<br />
helps us to solve this issue very well<br />
KEY WORDS: yield curve, interest rate term structure analysis, bootstrapping method<br />
Introduction<br />
The term structure of interest rates, also known as yield curve, is a static function that<br />
relates the term to maturity to the yield to maturity for a sample of bonds at a given point in<br />
time. Thus, it represents a cross section of yields for a category of bonds that are comparable<br />
in all respects but maturity.<br />
Specifically, the quality of the issues should be constant, and ideally you should have<br />
issues with similar coupons and call features within a single industry category. So you can<br />
construct different yield curves for Treasuries, government agencies, prime grade<br />
municipals, AAA utilities, and so on. The accuracy of the yield curve will just depend on the<br />
comparability of the bonds in the sample.<br />
In generally yield curves do not have the same shape at different points in time, thus<br />
term structure shape changes depends the time and depends the term to maturity. Depends<br />
on different term to maturity we knows the rising yield curve, declining yield curve, the flat<br />
yield curve or the humped yield curve. The rising yield curve is the most common and tends<br />
to prevail when interest rates are at low or modest levels. The declining yield curve tends to<br />
occur when rates are relatively high. The flat yield curve rarely exists for any period of time.<br />
The humped yield curve prevails when extremely high rates are expected to decline to more<br />
normal levels. Note that the slope of the yield curve tends to level off in general after 15<br />
years.<br />
*<br />
Acknowledgement: This article was written with the support of the VEGA project No. 1/0897/10.
Glova, J., Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 44-49) 45<br />
Different shape of the term structure or yield curve explains three major yield curve<br />
theories - the expectations hypothesis, the liquidity preference hypothesis, and the<br />
segmented market hypothesis [John Y. Campbell (1986)], [John C. Cox, Jonathan E. Ingersoll,<br />
Stephen A. Ross (1985)].<br />
Theoretical spot rate curve estimation using bootstrapping method<br />
The yield on a zero coupon bond for a given maturity is the spot rate for the maturity.<br />
Specifically, the spot rate is defined as the discount rate for a cash flow at a specific maturity.<br />
At that time, we used the rates on a series of zero coupon government bonds created by<br />
stripping coupon government bonds.<br />
In this case, we will construct a theoretical spot rate curve from the observable yield<br />
curve that is based on the existing yields of Treasury bills and the most recent Treasury<br />
coupon securities [Sanjay K. Nawalkha and Donald R. Chambers (1999)]. One might expect<br />
the theoretical spot rate curve and the spot rate curve derived from the stripped zero coupon<br />
bonds to be the same.<br />
The fact is, while they are close, they will not be exactly the same because the stripped<br />
zero coupon bonds will not be as liquid as the on-the-run issues. In addition, there are<br />
instances where institutions will have a strong desire for a particular spot maturity and this<br />
preference will distort the term structure relationship. Therefore, while it is possible to use<br />
the stripped zero coupon curve for a general indication, if you are going to use the spot rates<br />
for significant valuation, you would want to use the theoretical spot rate curve.<br />
The process of creating a theoretical spot rate curve from coupon securities is called<br />
bootstrapping wherein it is assumed that the value of the Treasury coupon security should<br />
be equal to the value of the package of zero coupon securities that duplicates the coupon<br />
bond’s cash flow.<br />
The theoretical price of zero coupon bond ( ) should equal to<br />
where .<br />
, (1)<br />
Consider set of coupon securities with semi annual coupon payment and continuous<br />
interest running. Then the 0,5 year coupon security should equal to 0,5 year zero coupon<br />
security containing the face value and 0,5 year coupon payment . The general relation for the<br />
theoretical price of this bond [Vincent Šoltés a Michal Šoltés (2007)] is<br />
The theoretical price of 0,5 year coupon bond is then<br />
where is the face value, is 0,5 year coupon payment paid at the maturity of bond,<br />
and is the theoretical spot rate of 0,5 year zero coupon bond or 0,5 year zero coupon<br />
yield. After simplifying<br />
(2)<br />
(3)<br />
(4)
46<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 44-49)<br />
To calculate the 1 year zero coupon we can use the price of a 1 year coupon bond and the<br />
theoretical spot rate of 0,5 year zero coupon bond, i.e.<br />
where is the face value, is the 0,5 year coupon paid at the end of 0,5 year and 1 year,<br />
and is the 1 year zero coupon yield. After simplifying we get<br />
(5)<br />
(6)<br />
Using 0,5 zero coupon yield form equation (4) in the equation (6) we compute the<br />
theoretical spot rate of 1 year zero coupon bond.<br />
Following the same approach the theoretical spot rates (or zero coupon yields) fall of the<br />
N maturities are calculated using the zero coupon yields of the previous maturities. In<br />
general about 15 maturities are sufficient to produce the whole yield curve of zero coupon<br />
bonds.<br />
Using the matrix theory in the bootstrapping method<br />
To obtain a direct solution we can apply matrix theory there. Let we consider bonds<br />
maturing at dates , and let be the total cash flow payments of ith bond (for<br />
) on the date (for ). Then the prices of bonds equal to<br />
(7)<br />
Generally described matrix equals to matrix product of matrix and matrix , then<br />
After simplifying to the matrix<br />
,<br />
where the matrix presents the square matrix to the matrix . To determine the inverse,<br />
we calculate using determinant of<br />
,<br />
, where (9)<br />
and where represents square matrix of type from the matrix .<br />
As you could see in (7), the upper triangle of the cash flow matrix on the right side has<br />
zero values. By multiplying both sides of equation (7) by the inverse matrix of the cash flow,<br />
we get the discount functions corresponding to maturities, then<br />
(8)<br />
(10)
Glova, J., Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 44-49) 47<br />
Note that this solution requires that the number of bonds equal the number of cash flow<br />
maturity dates.<br />
Matrix theory application in the bootstrapping method<br />
To demonstrate the bootstrapping method using the matrix approach we assume 10<br />
coupon bonds and their parameters given in the table below. For simplicity we assume all<br />
bonds make annual coupon payments. The face value of bonds is 100 €.<br />
Bond Price (in €) Maturity(in years) Coupon rate (in per cent p.a.)<br />
1 96,60 1 2<br />
2 93,71 2 2,5<br />
3 91,56 3 3<br />
4 90,24 4 3,5<br />
5 89,74 5 4<br />
6 90,04 6 4,5<br />
7 91,09 7 5<br />
8 92,82 8 5,5<br />
9 95,19 9 6<br />
10 98,14 10 6,5<br />
Using the matrix theory in the bootstrapping method given by equation (10) we get the<br />
discount functions corresponding to maturities, then<br />
Multiplication of these two matrices gives the solution<br />
The theoretical spot rates are obtained from the corresponding discount functions<br />
derived from equation (1) or
48<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 44-49)<br />
The particular zero coupon yields are depictured in Table 1. and Figure 1.<br />
Table 1. Particular zero coupon yields (in per cent p. a.)<br />
1 5,439%<br />
2 5,762%<br />
3 5,995%<br />
4 6,164%<br />
5 6,294%<br />
6 6,393%<br />
7 6,470%<br />
8 6,533%<br />
9 6,582%<br />
10 6,621%<br />
Figure 1. Theoretical spot rate curve<br />
Conclusion<br />
The yield curve (or the term structure of interest rates) shows the relationship between the<br />
yields on a set of comparable bonds and the term to maturity. Based upon this yield curve, it<br />
is possible to derive a theoretical spot rate curve. Such as basic method applied for derivation<br />
of the yield curve (or several theoretical spot rates) is the bootstrapping method.<br />
Unfortunately, there is great computing severity related to this method. Fortunately,<br />
however, the application of matrix theory helps us to solve this issue very well, as we<br />
suggested in this paper. In turn, these spot rates can be used to value bonds using an<br />
individual spot rate for each cash flow. This valuation approach is becoming more useful in a<br />
world where bonds have very different cash flows. In addition, these spot rates imply<br />
investor expectations about future rates referred to as forward rates.
References<br />
Glova, J., Matrix Theory Application in the Bootstrapping, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 44-49) 49<br />
Campbell, J. Y. (1986), “A Defense of Traditional Hypotheses about the Term Structure of Interest<br />
Rates,” <strong>Journal</strong> of Finance, 41: 183–193.<br />
Cox, J. C., Ingersoll, J. E. and S. A. Ross (1985), “A Theory of the Term Structure of Interest Rates,”<br />
Econometrica, 53: 385–408.<br />
Nawalkha, S. K., and D. R. Chambers (1999), “Interest Rate Risk Measurement and Management”,<br />
New York: Institutional Investor.<br />
Šoltés, V., Šoltés, M. (2007), “Maximum and Limit Value of the Duration of the Coupon Bond, In:<br />
Economics and Management, 10 (4): 87–91.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 12 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 15 March 2010
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
Method of Banks Valuation<br />
Horvátová Eva * , University of Economics in Bratislava, Faculty of National Economy,<br />
Department of Banking and International Finance, Bratislava, Slovakia<br />
UDC: 336.717 JEL: G21<br />
ABSTRACT – Since there is not a special common framework for valuation banks and it gives<br />
possibilities to create establishment, improvement and adaptation of various approaches to measuring<br />
the value of banks and financial institutions.<br />
Most approaches banks valuation note the strong dependence of financial institutions value from<br />
market interest rates (Mishkin, F., Miller, WD, Copeland, T., Koller, T., Damodaran, A., and others).<br />
Each approache reflects greater or lesser degree of accuracy depending on the method of determining<br />
resources for owners, the discount factor, approaches to defining the rate of growth and methods of<br />
measurement.<br />
KEY WORDS: banks valuation methods, free cash flow equity, discounting factor, cost on equity,<br />
beta factor<br />
Introduction<br />
The issue of banks and financial institutions valuation have been written relatively few<br />
comprehensive theoretical and methodological work. The valuation is carried out by experts<br />
and expertise for different purposes and with varying degrees of methodological accuracy of<br />
the estimate of input factors. A significant shift in valuation theory and practice came when<br />
R. C. Merton (1973) [1], introduced the risk-neutral valuation model for financial assets. Bank<br />
valuation under this model can be interpreted as determining the value of a call option on<br />
the value of bank assets. 1<br />
Currently, (August 2009), R. C. Merton (2009) in the context of the financial crisis makes<br />
the promotion of a market valuation of banks and their components. It states that banks and<br />
entities that oppose the use of market valuation, are trying to hide the fall in prices. Equally<br />
critically views on issues of aid, saying that the government is trying to solve complex<br />
problems easily. He also expressed the desire to stimulate trading in securities market in<br />
order to restore the natural function of the market in setting prices. About using of<br />
derivatives, the lack of market information for investors blames frozen market. 2<br />
* Address: Dolnozemská cesta 1, 85235 Bratislava, Slovakia., e-mail: eva.horvatova@euba.sk<br />
1<br />
Merton, R. C. An intertemporal Capital Assets Pricing Model. Econometrica. Vol. 41, 1973.<br />
http://ideas.repec.org/a/ecm/emetrp/v41y1973i5p867-87.html<br />
2<br />
Merton, R. C.: Mark it to market. August, 19, 2009.<br />
http://www.swampreport.com/investments/scholes-and-merton-mark-it-to-market/
Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 51<br />
A. Damodaran (2002) says, that „the fundamental valuation rules may be applied equally<br />
to companies such as to financial services institutions“ 3 , should be pointed here.<br />
Some approaches to the bank valuation note the strong dependence of financial<br />
institutions value from market interest rates (Mishkin, F., Miller, WD, Copeland, T., Koller,<br />
T., Damodaran, A., and others).<br />
Each approache reflects greater or lesser degree of accuracy depending on the method of<br />
determining resources for owners, the discount factor, approaches to defining the rate of<br />
growth and methods of measurement.<br />
T. Copeland highlights that the interest rate risk should focus attention on 4 factors: 1<br />
interest margin between the market rate and bank rate, as well as their flexibility to market<br />
developments, 2 dynamics of tidal funds, 3 degree of substitution of banking products and<br />
services as an alternative to interest-rate changes, 4 need to cover risks arising from maturity<br />
mismatch of assets and liabilities part of the profit.<br />
Koch, T. W. (2005), Samuelson, Klein and Monti formulate a conclusion on the positive<br />
relationship between net income and the relative market power of banks. These theoretical<br />
ideas support empirical research work such as Damodaran, A., as well as other authors. A<br />
significant shift in valuation theory and practice came when R. C. Merton (1973) [2]<br />
introduced the risk-neutral valuation model for financial assets. Bank valuation under this<br />
model can be interpreted as determining the value of a call option on the value of bank<br />
assets. 4<br />
Valuation of banks and financial institutions by the yield method<br />
Business valuation models are largely based on discounted cash flow approach (DCF model)<br />
and assume some growth stages, which is typical for different growth rate of cash flow or<br />
resources for owners.<br />
Expression of FCFE (Free Cash Flow Equity) in financial institutions<br />
The annual effect on the owner may be defined differently. This may be as free cash flow<br />
to shareholders (FCFE - Free Cash Flow Equity) generated as operating profit by reducing<br />
the costs that are not spending in the current period and the investment needed work and<br />
investment property for the operation.<br />
According W.D. Miller, the desire is to move closer to the category income of owners net<br />
proceeds, which could be as bank potencial of dividends. Sometimes, in this case refers to the<br />
free cash flow to shareholders (Free Cash Flow Equity).<br />
Using cash flow as a basis for calculating income of owners as dividend income potential<br />
for the owners of the bank is inappropriate for two reasons:<br />
3<br />
Damodaran, A.: Investment Valuation. 2-nd edition. John Wiley & Sons, 2002, 2002. ISBN 978-0-471-<br />
75121-2, page 603.<br />
4<br />
Merton, R. C. An intertemporal Capital Assets Pricing Model. Econometrica. Vol. 41, 1973.<br />
http://ideas.repec.org/a/ecm/emetrp/v41y1973i5p867-87.html
52<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />
• Statement of cash flows in the banking business is not suitable for determining<br />
sources for owners, such as dividends as source for owners can be paid only from<br />
real net income after tax and not from the movement of cash (cash flow);<br />
• Bank and company profits are not equally attainable by shareholders, in the bank<br />
there is no problem with the availability of cash to shareholders because of the<br />
nature of the vast majority of assets and liabilities, although other types of<br />
businesses can generate significant differences between cash flow and profits in<br />
the sense that the business generates profits, but not sufficient cash flow;<br />
• The main source of income in banking is the differences between interest income<br />
and expense, as well as fees for services.<br />
The valuation of financial institutions can not be made without respect of interest income<br />
and expense as the most significant component of their income and capital growth, or its<br />
renewal. The calculation of FCFE in banks and financial institutions can be implemented in<br />
two basic ways:<br />
1-st method of expressing FCFE:<br />
FCFE = net income - growth of capital + other income<br />
It should be noted that net income is not equal to cash flow. With the growth of financial<br />
institutions should also increase its capital. Growth FCFE lowers the capital, because it<br />
means that the bank is inserted into the banking business of profits that would otherwise be<br />
paid to owners as dividends. Otherwise, if the bankʹs growth has not been accompanied by<br />
an adequate increase in the capital, it could happen to failure of financial institutions due to<br />
lack of solvency.<br />
2-nd method of calculating FCFE:<br />
FCFE = resources from issue of shares - preference shares + dividends - capital increase (+<br />
decrease in capital)<br />
Changes in bank capital are resulting from the relationship between balance, profit and<br />
loss statements, cash flow and value of financial institutions. Changes in assets and liabilities<br />
are reflected in changes in equity.<br />
Equally polemical recommendation is adding into the value of cash flows the initial cash<br />
balance. The problem is the fact that they were a combination of yield method valuation and<br />
substance valuation method.<br />
Since the yield valuation takes into account the future potential of banks, it leads to the<br />
discussions on the question of the length of the period under review (planning period).<br />
For example, W. D. Miller (1995) [1] 5 advised to examine 10 years, others, such as M.<br />
Tucek 6 recommend 2-3 years. This follows from the specifics of the environment, for<br />
example, in U.S. valuation concerns small, local banks are not investment activities and<br />
5<br />
Miller, W. D.: Commercial Bank Valuation. John Villey and Sons, Inc., 1995, ISBN13 9780471128205,<br />
page 28.<br />
6<br />
Hrdý, M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Praha: Grada Publishing, 2005, ISBN 80-247-0938-4, page<br />
35.
Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 53<br />
planning for 10 years it may be relatively simply. Banks in Slovakia perform mixed<br />
operations, and planning the future results for longer than 5 years could cause problems.<br />
Net income as a basis for potential dividend or resource for owners by Koller, T.,<br />
Goedhard, M. and Wessels, D. (2005) [1] can establish two basic ways: 7<br />
1. On net interest income, or<br />
2. Model based on interest margins (Spread Model).<br />
Determination of the discount factor<br />
A particular problem is the correct determination of the discount factor to be within the<br />
individual models recommended. It is necessary to respect the logical links between the<br />
numerators and denominators and formulas used to discount the recommended indicators.<br />
There are different approaches for determining the interest rate for discounting, such as the<br />
determination of weighted average cost of capital. This method provides, in particular<br />
disposable cash flow for businesses, called the principle of Free Cash Flow of Firms (FCFF).<br />
The bank is not appropriate given the high gearing ratio (leverage). For the purposes of the<br />
valuation of banks need to set the cost of equity.<br />
Estimate the required rate of return on equity re<br />
In terms of banking, there are significant differences in the proportion of own and foreign<br />
sources of funding compared to other businesses. In the banking sector given the nature of<br />
the business of banking must accept a higher gearing ratio.<br />
Cost of capital represents the expected rate of income investors given the risk level of the<br />
investment. Since any form of business is associated with a higher risk than when depositing<br />
money in the bank, then the expected return is higher than interest rates in the bank.<br />
The role of the so-called risk-free rate rf (free of risk) may be selected interest rates on<br />
government bonds or yield to maturity of these types of bonds. Yield to maturity is<br />
recommended to use as a discount factor such as for example M. Marik (2007) [1]: ʺas a<br />
source for safe return to the Czech capital market, we recommend using such proceeds to<br />
maturity of government bonds with maturities equal to ten or more years by source Patria<br />
Finance.“ 8<br />
The cost of capital must be re invariably higher than rf in connection with the tax shield.<br />
Required rate of return on equity can provide a number of ways to serve its particular<br />
setting:<br />
• Gordon growth model,<br />
• CAPM (Capital Assets Pricing Model) or a model of capital assets<br />
• The average profitability<br />
• The cost of foreign funds<br />
7<br />
Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies.<br />
Fourth Edition, Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, Inc., 2005, ISBN: 978-0-471-70218-4, pages<br />
670 - 671.<br />
8<br />
Mařík, M.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené vydání. Praha: Ecopress, 2007,<br />
ISBN 978-80-86929-32-3, page 218.
54<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />
• APT model (Arbitrage Pricing Theory).<br />
1. Gordon growth model is based on a calculation of the growth rate of dividends:<br />
r<br />
where:<br />
dividends<br />
t+1<br />
e<br />
=<br />
+<br />
price of<br />
shares<br />
t<br />
g<br />
re = rate of return required by shareholders (return on equity)<br />
g = growth rate of dividends<br />
2. CAPM is used frequently, although it also has some shortcomings. This model assumes<br />
that the risk premium is proportional in relation to systematic risk β. The CAPM can be re<br />
established as follows:<br />
r<br />
e<br />
= r + β .<br />
f<br />
[ E( r ) − r ]<br />
m<br />
f<br />
where:<br />
Risk premium<br />
rf = risk-free interest rate<br />
re = rate of return required by shareholders (return on equity)<br />
β = systematic risk<br />
E (rm) = expected return on market portfolio<br />
3. The derivation of the discount rate based on average profitability. Data on the average<br />
profitability of the industry are relatively accessible, and therefore in practice often used to<br />
determine the cost of equity. The disadvantage of this method is the impact on accounting<br />
practices can distort the indicator ROE. The downside is mainly the lack of data on market<br />
value of capital of financial institutions, as the book value of capital is not suitable for these<br />
purposes.<br />
The basic conditions of DCF models include a requirement that the discount rate used to<br />
be in session with the risk profile of cash flow (for example: FCFF ↔ WACC or FCFE ↔ re). 9<br />
For the valuation of banks is appropriate to use a model based on FCFE. FCFE is generally<br />
recommended to enjoy when financial leverage is stable and this is relatively high. Using the<br />
FCFE model is preferred and recommended if it can generate a large difference between the<br />
dividends and FCFE.<br />
An alternative model is the dividend FCFE model. In practice, it could happen that the<br />
dividends could be higher than FCFE, the likely addition to the problems in the management<br />
of financial institutions and causing uncertainty in their valuations. It is recommended and<br />
preferred by Hrdý, M. (2005) [1] model for the dividend FCFE model. 10<br />
9<br />
Kislingerová, E.: Oceňování podniku. 2. přepracované a doplnené vydání. Praha: C. H. Beck, 2001,<br />
ISBN 80-7179-529-1, page 160.<br />
10<br />
Hrdý, M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Praha: Grada Publishing, 2005, ISBN 80-247-0938-4, page<br />
23., and Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of<br />
Companies. Fourth Edition, Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, Inc., 2005, ISBN: 978-0-471-
Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 55<br />
Using the FCFE valuation model, banks are avoiding the use of WACC.<br />
The average weighted cost of capital - WACC is always lower than the cost of equity – re,<br />
which corresponds with the result that they are reduced by the so-called tax shield resulting<br />
from the use of foreign funds and netting interest expenses to the bank.<br />
Determination of the beta coefficient<br />
Another problem is the calculation of the beta coefficient. For example M. Hrdý (2005) [2]<br />
11<br />
recommends using a simplified assumption that β is equal to one, because it assumes that<br />
changes in the profitability of financial institutions are equal to changes in market portfolio<br />
returns.<br />
Another argument in favor of simplifying the calculation of the beta coefficient is that<br />
fairly significant change of beta affects the overall change in the risk premium in the<br />
relatively small scale, and also a rather complex calculation of the coefficient beta. Above<br />
mentioned (the relatively low impact on the valuation premium) is shown on a graph.<br />
50<br />
40<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
Cost on equity (required return) by different<br />
degrees of risk (4 risk degrees) for maximum re<br />
0<br />
1 2 3 4<br />
max. r e is 20% max. re is 30%<br />
max. r e i is 40 %<br />
If the valuation is performed in less stable conditions, or if there are other reasons to<br />
choose a more accurate calculation of β, we use these basic approaches:<br />
1. Coefficient estimate based on historical data.<br />
2. By analogy.<br />
3. An analysis of factors.<br />
Beta coefficient expresses sensitivity to market risk. Actions that have beta between 0 and<br />
1.0 tend to move in the same direction as the market, but not to an extent.<br />
Rapidly growing company has beta over 5 years at level 1.11. The market growth of 1 %<br />
will increase the companyʹs stock price by 1.11 % or decrease by 2 % of the market reduces<br />
price of shares by 2.22 %. 12<br />
70218-4, page 668., and Mařík, M. and all.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené<br />
vydání. Praha: Ekopress, 2007, ISBN 978-80-869929-3, page 206.<br />
11<br />
Hrdý , M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Grada Publishing, Praha 2005, ISBN 80-247-0938-4, page<br />
10.<br />
12<br />
Brealey, R. A., Myers, S. C.: Teorie a praxe firemních financí. Praha: East Publishing, 1992, ISBN 80-<br />
85605-24-4, page 153.
56<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />
Beta coefficient may be measured on the basis of historical data and hence the change in<br />
performance of individual shares in the bank, depending on changes in market portfolio as<br />
follows:<br />
β<br />
n ×<br />
∑R(<br />
S)<br />
× R(<br />
mp)<br />
− ∑R(<br />
S)<br />
× ∑<br />
2<br />
n × ∑R(<br />
mp)<br />
− ( ∑R(<br />
mp))<br />
=<br />
2<br />
R(<br />
mp)<br />
where:<br />
β - a quantitative measure of the volatility of portfolio<br />
R (S) - return on shares of a particular bank<br />
R (mp) - return on market portfolio,<br />
n - number of years of evolution.<br />
The disadvantage of this method is that it is not possible to reliably use knowledge about<br />
the development of beta from past to the future.<br />
The beta factor derives also by analogy from the following relationship by Marik, M.<br />
(2007) [2] 13<br />
⎛ D<br />
β<br />
L<br />
= β<br />
u<br />
⋅⎜1+<br />
⎟ β<br />
d<br />
1<br />
⎝ E ⎠<br />
Where:<br />
⎞<br />
D<br />
( 1−<br />
t) ⋅ − ⋅ ( − t) ⋅ E<br />
ΒU = Beta at zero debt (unlevered beta) 14<br />
ΒL = beta entity debt (levered beta)<br />
ΒD = beta for debt = 0<br />
t = tax rate<br />
This method of determining the beta is an appropriate indicator in the valuation of banks.<br />
Βeta coefficients are published for each industry and country.<br />
As the beta for foreign capital is 0, the resulting relationship is:<br />
⎛<br />
β = β<br />
u<br />
⋅⎜1+<br />
⎝<br />
L<br />
1<br />
D<br />
E<br />
⎞<br />
( − t) ⋅ ⎟<br />
⎠<br />
This relationship expresses the dependence of beta on the degree of indebtedness of the<br />
entity. With this option you can use data on individual sectors of beta. Coefficients are<br />
published for debted and indebted companies.<br />
The objective determination of β is the worldʹs best practice accepted valuation model<br />
CAPM. It is recommended that indicators of the environment of the U.S. market have been<br />
adjusted to current country risk. Capital costs are then expressed by:<br />
13<br />
Mařík, M.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené vydání. Praha: Ecopress, 2007,<br />
ISBN 978-80-86929-32-3, page 225.<br />
14<br />
Data on the average values of β coefficients for each industry states are published on website of<br />
Aswath Damodaran (www.damodaran.com , Section Updated Data). The average value of β in 2009<br />
for European countries indicated 1.04 and the average βU is at 0.80.
Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 57<br />
re = rf<br />
+ β ⋅ RPM + RPC<br />
Where:<br />
RPM = market risk premium<br />
RPC = country risk premium is recommended to calculate than 1.5 times the risk of<br />
failure in the country (0,7.1,5) + 0.6 difference between inflation in the U.S. and for<br />
example in Slovakia.<br />
Determination of the cost of equity based on CAPM (on the example of Slovakia)<br />
Current risk-free return is 3.5 %;<br />
The risk premium for the capital market in Slovakia 7.21 % 15<br />
Country risk premium 2.21 %<br />
Unlevered beta for specialized banking services 0.23 %,<br />
The ratio of debt and equity 0.95 %.<br />
β<br />
r<br />
=<br />
L<br />
β u<br />
⎛ D ⎞<br />
⋅⎜1 + ⎟<br />
=<br />
⎝ E ⎠<br />
( 1−<br />
d ) ⋅ = 0,23⋅<br />
( 1+<br />
( 1−<br />
0,19)<br />
⋅ 0,95) 0, 41<br />
= r + ⋅ RPM + RPC = 3 ,5 + 0,41⋅<br />
7,21+<br />
2,21 = 8,67<br />
e f<br />
β<br />
The cost on equity methods based on CAPM model, are assuming the input data set to<br />
8.67 % in Slovakia.<br />
Practical problems and procedures of bank valuation<br />
A key practical problem when evaluating the bank will determine the future anticipated<br />
net effect on the owner, plans for future net earnings.<br />
Future development of profit can be detected in two ways:<br />
• Regression analysis;<br />
• A financial plan based on data compiled from balance sheet and profit and loss<br />
account.<br />
The method of regression analysis is appropriate for the valuation of banksʹ long-term<br />
stable conditions, and operating in developed economies. Regression analysis is more<br />
suitable for banks than for companies, because regulatory frameworks for business banking<br />
ensure continuous development without major fluctuations.<br />
Nevertheless, the most accurate and most reliable way to estimate deemed dividend<br />
potential is derived from the financial plan for the bank. The expert must be able to assess<br />
future development of bank finances and key items of bank profits. The aim should be to<br />
approximate the planned balance sheet and profit and loss account over the next 5 years.<br />
Important indicators are known profit generators such as loans and other earning assets,<br />
recently banks have a large proportion of income from fees for services, which should also be<br />
included in the calculations.<br />
15<br />
http://pages.stern.nyu.edu./adamodar/
58<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />
The task of valuing the bank by the yield method is ultimately provided by continuing<br />
value to the bank. The formula for calculating the discounted value of continuing is as<br />
follows:<br />
CV<br />
=<br />
Where:<br />
CV<br />
Div5<br />
i<br />
g<br />
Div<br />
5<br />
. ( 1 + g)<br />
1<br />
.<br />
( i − g) ( ) 5<br />
1 + i<br />
- continuing value of bank<br />
- Expected dividend paid in the 5-th year<br />
- Interest rate used to discount<br />
- Expected dividend growth rate per year<br />
With a similar approach is also encountered in determining the value of ongoing<br />
(Continuing Value) in the work by T. Koller, M. Goedharda and D. Wessels (2005) [2]: 16<br />
СV<br />
⎛<br />
NI ⋅ ⎜1<br />
−<br />
=<br />
⎝<br />
g<br />
RONE<br />
( k g)<br />
e<br />
−<br />
⎞<br />
⎟<br />
⎠<br />
Where:<br />
NI - expected net revenue in 1-st year after the end the projected period<br />
g - expected dividend growth rate per year<br />
ke - cost of equity (required return)<br />
RONE - increasing the return on new capital<br />
Conclusions – why is bank valuation important<br />
At present, confidence in the banking and financial sector is simulated by states and their<br />
guarantees. Experience of banking sector restructuring in SR gives an example of how many<br />
banks are able to operate with inadequate or even having a negative value of capital.<br />
If it is well known that a major bank failure is undesirable because it would cause serious<br />
economic problems, then a function of confidence in the bank does not perform as bank<br />
capital, as some fiction or a social agreement, which may have different real form.<br />
The question arises whether the trust bank can reliably operate on this basis. It is<br />
undisputed and confirmed that the practice in the short term is possible. In the medium and<br />
long term, it is only a matter of time before such a basis for confidence in a banking<br />
institution is exhausted and positive incentives will be more costly than alternative problems<br />
for radical action against the bank.<br />
Such confidence is not inexhaustible; its boundaries are identical with states and<br />
capabilities of countries. There is a risk of such an approach, on the other hand, if the banks<br />
do not use this second chance, the financial crisis could be even greater.<br />
16<br />
Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies.<br />
Fourth Edition, Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, Inc., 2005, ISBN: 978-0-471-70218-4, page<br />
669.
Horvátová, E., Method of Banks Valuation, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 50-60) 59<br />
At present, the consequences of the financial crisis occurred requirements (for example,<br />
Merton R.C.) to value banks by the market valuing approach, which uncovered a genuine<br />
reality and lead to more real situation on the financial and banking market. Such an<br />
approach would certainly be very appropriate.<br />
Valuation of banksʹ issues are important because the focus has to be not on profit growth,<br />
but on growth of stability and hence the value of the bank. Banks managers also should not<br />
have rewards based on profit but on the basis of value growth of institution, which they<br />
manage.<br />
Therefore, the states and supervisory institutions to carefully analyze the effectiveness of<br />
its intervention measures to support banking and financial market and take such measures<br />
that would prevent the repeat similar problems. Access to regulate the banking sector varies<br />
depending on the distance of negative experiences. This area will be clearly show degree of<br />
risk in dealing with its negative consequences. Addressing the negative consequences of the<br />
risks of using public funds is a sign that many economic entities, in principle, are not able to<br />
cover all the risks that they may occur, and therefore in my view, essential is that such<br />
entities to regulate the rate of risk-taking potential exist. It is necessary to believe that<br />
negative experiences will serve as a warning against gambling of people and countries, as in<br />
the historical experience translated it into a collective sacrifice of wealth necessary to prevent<br />
fatal consequences of similar threats.<br />
References<br />
Adams, M., Markus, R.: A new Approach to the Valuation of Banks. http://www.campusforfinance.com/fileadmin/content/cffrc/documents/2007/Banking_I_Adams.pdf<br />
Allen, F., Galle, D.: Comparing Financial Systems. Cambridge: MIT Press 2000. ISBN 0-262-01177-8.<br />
Benninga, S.: Bank Valuation. New York Instirute of Finance Course in Singapore,<br />
www.wharton.upenn.edu, February 13, 2001.<br />
Benninga, S. , Sarig, O.: Bank Valuation. February 13, 2001.<br />
http://senverb.boun.edu.tr/pdf/Bank%20Valuation.pdf<br />
Brealey, R. A., Myers, S. C.: Teorie a praxe firemních financí. Praha: East Publishing 1992, ISBN 80-<br />
85605-24-4.<br />
Calomiris, Ch. W., Doron Nissim: Activity Based Valuation of Bank Holding Companies. Working Paper<br />
12918. http://www.nber.org/papers/w12918.<br />
Davis, S. I.: Bank Mergers. Lessons for the Future. London: Macmillan 2000. ISBN 0-333-91260-8.<br />
Damodaran, A.: Investment Valuation. 2-nd edition. John Wiley & Sons 2002. ISBN 978-0-471-75121-2.<br />
www.damodaran.com (sekcia Updated Data).<br />
http://pages.stern.nyu.edu./adamodar/<br />
Freixas, X., Rochet, J. CH.: Microeconomics of Banking. Cambridge: MIT Press 1998. ISBN 0-262-06193-7.<br />
Horvátová, E.: Bankovníctvo. Žilina: GEORG 2009. ISBN 978-80-89401-03-1.<br />
Hrdý, M.: Oceňování finančních institucí. Praha: GRADA Publishing, 2005. ISBN 80-247-0938-4,<br />
Kidwll, D. S., Peterson, R. P., Blacwell, D.W.: Financial Institutions, Markets and Money. Forth Worth:<br />
The Dryden Press 1993.<br />
Koller, T., Goedhard, M., Wessels, D.: Valuation, Measuring and Managing the Value of Companies.<br />
Fourth edition. Mc Kinsey & Company John Willey & Sons, ISBN 0471702188, ISBN: 978-0-471-<br />
70218-4.<br />
Levy, H., Sarnat, M.: Kapitálové investice a finanční rozhodování. Praha: Grada Publishing 1999. ISBN 80-<br />
7169-504-1.
60<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 50-60)<br />
Kislingerová, E.: Oceňování podniku. Praha: C. H. Beck, 2001. ISBN 80-7179-529-1.<br />
Mařík, M.: Metody oceňování podniku. Druhé upravené a rozšířené vydání. Praha: Ecopress 2007, ISBN<br />
978-80-86929-32-3.<br />
Merton, R. C.: An intertemporal Capital Assets Pricing Model. Econometrica. Vol. 41, 1973.<br />
http://ideas.repec.org/a/ecm/emetrp/v41y1973i5p867-87.html<br />
Merton, R. C.: Mark it to market. August, 19, 2009. http://www.swampreport.com/investments/scholesand-merton-mark-it-to-market/<br />
Miller, W.D.: Commercial Bank Valuation. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., USA 1995, ISBN13 9780471128205.<br />
Mishkin, F.: Economics of Money, Banking and Financial Markets. Reading: Addison-Wesley 2003. ISBN<br />
0-321-20049-7.<br />
Rose, P. S., Hudgins, S. C.: Bank Management and Financial Services. Boston: McGraw Hill 2005. ISBN 0-<br />
07-286163-0.<br />
Sharpe, W.F., Alexander, G.J.: Investice. Praha: Victoria Publishing 1993. ISBN 80-85605-47-3.<br />
Sinkey, J. F.: Commercial Bank Financial Management. London: Prentice Hall 1998. ISBN 0-13-521048-8.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 7 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 7 March 2010
SCIENTIFIC RIEVIEW<br />
Future Stance of Currencies in the International<br />
Monetary System<br />
Kotlebova Jana * , Economic University in Bratislava, Faculty of National Economy,<br />
Department of Banking and International Finance, Slovak Republic<br />
UDC: 348.246; 339.743 JEL: F31; G15<br />
ABSTARCT – The current global crisis is a manifestation of global imbalance. Higher creation of<br />
savings in emerging economies compared to developed countries; higher investments of developed<br />
economies in comparison with developing countries; the current account deficit of the balance of<br />
payments in developed countries as opposed to the current account surplus of the balance of payments<br />
in emerging economies create new conditions for future stance of currencies in the international<br />
monetary system.<br />
The future aspect of the international monetary system is, at present, a major topic of discussion<br />
for monetary authorities as well as supranational institutions. The intention of this contribution is to<br />
highlight the main trends in its development<br />
KEY WORDS: global imbalance, savings, investment, foreign exchange reserves, balance of<br />
payment, importance of currencies for the international market, international monetary system<br />
Introduction<br />
We are in the fourth year of existence of the current global crisis, whereby the claim that<br />
it is in its final stage, is delivered with great prudence. According to the World Economic<br />
Outlook of the International Monetary Fund in October 2009 “after contracting by about 1 %<br />
in 2009, global activity is forecast to expand by about 3 percent in 2010, which is well below<br />
the rates achieved before the crisis”.<br />
Global imbalance<br />
The global economy has been transformed from the so-called bipolar world, where<br />
countries were explicitly divided into rich and poor, and global economic growth was<br />
determined by developments in the USA and Europe, into a world that can be described as<br />
multipolar, in which emerging and developing economies have been assigned a significant<br />
role from a global perspective. Menbere Tiruneh Workie (2007, 29)<br />
Since 2004 the global economy has vaulted to the current account surplus of the balance<br />
of payments thanks to developing countries. Developed economies demonstrate a current<br />
account deficit of the balance of payments. The graph outlines the IMF forecasts, which<br />
indicate the time at which the current account of the balance of payments in the aftermath of<br />
*<br />
Tel.: 00421 905 225 931, e-mail: jana.kotlebova@euba.sk
62<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />
the global financial crisis should gradually decrease in the advanced economies, whereas<br />
further export growth is expected in emerging and developing economies.<br />
Graph 1. Development of the current account of balance of payments in major country groups<br />
( % of GDP)<br />
6<br />
5<br />
4<br />
% of GDP<br />
3<br />
2<br />
1<br />
0<br />
-1<br />
-2<br />
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010<br />
Emerging and developing economies<br />
Advanced economies<br />
Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org<br />
(2009 and 2010 – forecast of IMF)<br />
If we compare savings and investment in the major country groups of the world, we can<br />
notice, that investments in advanced economies are not covered by the creation of savings;<br />
on the contrary, in the case of emerging economies and developing economies savings<br />
exceed investments. The basic breakdown of countries into two groups can thus indicate the<br />
fact that investments in more developed parts of the world are created because of the savings<br />
of less developed parts of the world. If we look at the global data, we can notice that<br />
investments and savings stand almost on the same level, which could testify to the<br />
maintenance of global equilibrium; however, a detailed analysis of these data, according to<br />
other subgroups, can lead to interesting facts.<br />
The unambiguous conclusion of the analysis of the relationship between savings and<br />
investment is that the driving force of the current global economy is the savings in the<br />
developing world and the newly industrialized Asian economies. This tendency should be<br />
supported in the future by the fact that in these countries there is a strong population
Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 63<br />
growth, which creates space for the future growth of consumption and demand, which<br />
creates the prerequisites for their further economic growth.<br />
Graph 2. The development of savings and investments in developed and emerging economies<br />
as % of GDP<br />
40<br />
35<br />
% of GDP<br />
30<br />
25<br />
20<br />
15<br />
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008 2009 2010<br />
Advanced Economies Investment<br />
Advanced Economies Gross National Savings<br />
Emerging and Developing Economies Investment<br />
Emerging and Developing Economis Gross National Savings<br />
Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org<br />
(2009 and 2010 – forecast of IMF)<br />
Foreign Exchange Reserves<br />
Since 2005, it has been possible to monitor the higher creation of foreign exchange<br />
reserves in emerging and developing economies rather than in developed economies. The<br />
largest foreign exchange reserves (data to June 2008) are held by China (1.7 billion USD),<br />
Japan (0.97 billion U.S. dollars), Russia (0.55 billion USD).
64<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />
Graph 3. Development of foreign exchange reserves in the world since 1995 to present<br />
8000000<br />
7000000<br />
6000000<br />
in millions of USD<br />
5000000<br />
4000000<br />
3000000<br />
2000000<br />
1000000<br />
0<br />
1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008<br />
Advanced Economies Emerging and Developing Economies Total Foreign Exchange Holdings<br />
Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org<br />
Foreign exchange reserves are used to cover imports, foreign exchange interventions and<br />
balancing the movements in the capital and financial accounts of the balance of payments.<br />
As a result of more frequent financial crises in emerging economies, these incentives have<br />
been completed in order to protect the economy from the threat of loss of international<br />
liquidity (mainly due to a sudden outflow of capital). The main source of foreign exchange<br />
reserves in these countries is the net income from international trade and capital movements.<br />
Graph 4. Structure of global foreign exchange reserves from 2000 to present<br />
60<br />
50<br />
40<br />
%<br />
30<br />
20<br />
10<br />
0<br />
2000 2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008<br />
USD GBP JPY CHF EUR other<br />
Source: author’s own processing, data from www.imf.org
Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 65<br />
After the launch of EMU, there has been a visible increase of the EUR in the foreign<br />
exchange portfolio and a drop in dollars. However, the U.S. dollar still continues to hold a<br />
strong position in the currency structure of the foreign exchange portfolio (about 65%).<br />
Importance of currencies for the international market<br />
When talking about international currencies, we are interested in the extent to which a<br />
certain currency is used outside the domestic economy (the place of its issuance). Some<br />
authors, for example, E. G. Lim, refer to it as a currency that is used ʺoutside the domestic<br />
economy by non-residents for transactions with residents of the domestic economy or with<br />
residents of third countriesʺ E. G. Lim (2006). Another approach attributes an international<br />
attribute to the currency based on its scope of usage as a currency of debt denomination<br />
issued by non-residents on the capital market.<br />
The European Central Bank assesses the international role of a particular currency based<br />
on the extent to which this currency is used as denomination for various financial assets and<br />
liabilities outside the area of its issuance, as a nominal anchor, reserve and intervention<br />
currency for central banks in certain third countries and as a parallel currency used by<br />
private agents in some geographically adjacent economies. At the same time, it assesses its<br />
importance as a currency (vehicle currency) in some segments of the global foreign exchange<br />
market. Therefore, it assesses two major aspects:<br />
a) the importance of the currency for the international bond market, foreign<br />
exchange market and the international market for goods and services,<br />
b) the importance of the currency for third countries.<br />
The largest issuers in the international bond market are the globally operating financial<br />
institutions and corporations. As foreign currency denomination, they mainly use USD, EUR<br />
or GBP. The international debt securities in USD are issued by European banks and<br />
corporations, whereas these securities in EUR are issued by investment banks and<br />
corporations from the United States, Great Britain and some European countries outside the<br />
euro area. The importance of the international bond market in total activities of the<br />
international global capital market has fallen due to the development of further financial<br />
markets that are open to foreign investors. Therefore, the international bond market is<br />
becoming a less significant indicator of a currency of international importance. Central banks<br />
in emerging economies and sovereign wealth funds have become large global investors, and<br />
have become increasingly active in the issuance of government bonds, corporate bonds and<br />
shares in third countries. The stock market has gained a considerable market share and<br />
therefore, it dictates the denomination of its own assets, and the international role of<br />
currencies.<br />
For example, Ch. Thimann (2009, 10) in his study argues that:<br />
a) the international bond market is excessively denominated in USD and EUR, and<br />
accounts for about 80% of the market, while on the dollar market segment EUR<br />
emissions account for 60%, on the EUR market the emissions from the USA and<br />
non-euro area countries account for 70% of emissions,
66<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />
b) the international bond market is relatively narrowly structured, financial<br />
institutions constitute 80% of the market, businesses, governments or<br />
international institutions account for the rest 20%,<br />
c) the choice of currency has been significantly influenced by entrepreneurial<br />
motives (control of balance, project financing, taxes) and by short-term cyclical<br />
factors (exchange rate predictions and interest rate differential).<br />
The international bond market, from the perspective of the narrow supply of debt<br />
instruments, does not have such a significant impact on the evaluation of the currency<br />
position as on the international currency. In a broader definition of supply of debt<br />
instruments, however, its impact on the role of currency in an international context is more<br />
significant, according to the IMF data; up to 11.2 trillion USD bonds are held abroad out of<br />
the total volume of bonds (18.4 trillion U.S. dollars), whereas in the narrow definition, it is<br />
only 7.8 trillion USD. In comparison, foreign holdings of shares account for 8.8 trillion USD.<br />
Graph 5. Issuance of Bonds with variable rates of interest by Currency Denominations<br />
9000000<br />
8000000<br />
7000000<br />
6000000<br />
bil. USD<br />
5000000<br />
4000000<br />
3000000<br />
2000000<br />
1000000<br />
0<br />
Dec.2000<br />
Dec.2001<br />
Dec.2002<br />
Dec.2003<br />
Dec.2004<br />
Dec.2005<br />
Dec.2006<br />
Dec.2007<br />
Dec.2008<br />
Sep.2009<br />
US dollar Euro Yen Pound sterling<br />
Sw iss franc Canadian dollar Other currencies Floating rate total<br />
Source: author’s own processing, data from www.bis.org
Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 67<br />
Graph 6. Issuance of Bonds with fixed rates of interest by Currency Denominations<br />
18000000<br />
16000000<br />
14000000<br />
12000000<br />
bil. USD<br />
10000000<br />
8000000<br />
6000000<br />
4000000<br />
2000000<br />
0<br />
Dec.2000<br />
Dec.2001<br />
Dec.2002<br />
Dec.2003<br />
Dec.2004<br />
Dec.2005<br />
Dec.2006<br />
Dec.2007<br />
Dec.2008<br />
Sep.2009<br />
US dollar Euro Yen Pound sterling<br />
Swiss franc Canadian dollar Other currencies Straight fixed rate total<br />
Source: author’s own processing, data from www.bis.org<br />
The previous graphs can be used to monitor that the euro is used as a currency<br />
denomination of bonds to a much greater extent than the USD. This tendency in the world<br />
started to create the euro in 2002 (commercial papers and bonds with floating interest rates),<br />
in the case of other debt securities, two years later, in 2004. The biggest difference with the<br />
preference of the euro as denomination against the USD has been recorded in bonds with<br />
variable interest rate.<br />
A few years ago, there were concerns about a tripolar monetary system in which three<br />
currencies were to play a key role - USD, EUR and the Japanese yen. The current approach to<br />
the usage of currencies in the bond, foreign exchange and commodity markets in the world,<br />
however, suggests an entirely different trend.<br />
Graph 7. Development of the main pair USD/EUR<br />
1,7<br />
1,6<br />
1,5<br />
1,4<br />
1,3<br />
1,2<br />
1,1<br />
1<br />
0,9<br />
0,8<br />
I/99<br />
V/99<br />
IX/99<br />
I/00<br />
V/00<br />
IX/00<br />
I/01<br />
V/01<br />
IX/01<br />
I/02<br />
V/02<br />
IX/02<br />
I/03<br />
V/03<br />
IX/03<br />
I/04<br />
V/04<br />
IX/04<br />
I/05<br />
V/05<br />
IX/05<br />
I/06<br />
V/06<br />
IX/06<br />
I/07<br />
V/07<br />
IX/07<br />
I/08<br />
V/08<br />
IX/08<br />
I/09<br />
V/09<br />
IX/09<br />
Source: author’s own processing, data from www.ecb.int
68<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 61-69)<br />
If we were to comment upon the first question, then, for example, M. D. Chinn and J. A.<br />
Frankel(2008, 4) argue that the USD will lose its position as the main currency due to the fact<br />
that the EUR is a much more serious rival than the mark or yen used to be in the past, and<br />
the USA have already had a chronic current account deficit of the balance of payments for 25<br />
years and 35 years of USD depreciation. It is assumed that this will happen in 2015.<br />
Conclusion<br />
All the previously mentioned factors indicate the fact that the future development of the<br />
international monetary system will not continue in its conventional manner, but it will be<br />
fully affected by the approach of developed countries to developing world.<br />
On the question of the relationship between the USD and the euro there have been<br />
several discussions. Jean-Claude Trichet (President of the ECB) has said that the further<br />
depreciation of the USD is unacceptable for the euro area since it would mean the artificial<br />
overvaluation of the euro, whose exchange rate would not reflect the real economic<br />
development of the euro area, which would cause additional risks to maintain its stability in<br />
the future.<br />
Of course, it is necessary to take into account the further progress of economic integration<br />
in other regions of the world. For example, the countries of the Gulf in 2010 are planning to<br />
launch a monetary union with a common currency. At present, the composition of a common<br />
currency basket is being analysed. The risk is that these countries are major oil exporters, and<br />
they have already joined the trade in this commodity in a currency other than USD, which in<br />
the future could mean a further depreciation of USD.<br />
Similar integration schemes can also be observed in Africa and Asia, but their<br />
implementation is a matter of the distant future.<br />
As for the Chinese yuan, China is among the economies with the highest foreign<br />
exchange reserves, increasing exports and high savings creation. Moreover, in the past, they<br />
purchased large amounts of bonds denominated in USD, much of which is approaching<br />
maturity.<br />
Moreover, the recovery of the U.S. economy is not realised in such a pace as it was<br />
planned by an optimistic scenario.<br />
The G20 requested, for example, the European Commission to accelerate a further<br />
expansion of the euro area countries, which would protect their economies against the<br />
excessive volatility of exchange rates due to the financial crisis. The answer by the EC,<br />
however, to this proposal was unequivocal; the euro area would not abandon its<br />
enlargement strategy based on the fulfilment of the Maastricht criteria, since it considers<br />
price and financial stability as its main priority.<br />
Commenting upon the future outlook of the international monetary system there have<br />
been several discussions. Perhaps, the proposal of France and Great Britain on the creation of<br />
the Bretton Woods II system, which would again mean a return to the gold standard,<br />
whereas the main currency should be the IMFʹs special drawing rights (SDRs). Although this<br />
proposal is more or less criticized. Major opponents argue that the IMF membership (185<br />
countries) is very different today than it was at its birth, since emerging and developing<br />
countries are more represented than developed ones, while those given the growing debts
Kotlebova, J., Future Stance of Currencies in the IMS, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 61-69) 69<br />
can be a threat to the restoration of international stability. Moreover, the Triffin paradox,<br />
which is well known for the BWS I failure, should be remembered. The increase in current<br />
account deficits of the balance of payments associated with the growth of public debt does<br />
not guarantee the basis for the international monetary system, which must meet the stability<br />
and other features such as liquidity and symmetry in international monetary relations.<br />
In regard to foreign trade in goods and services, the dominant currency denomination of<br />
transactions is still the American dollar, but here we can see a downward trend. Changes in<br />
the exchange rate alternate the value of mutual obligations and claims of the parties entering<br />
into business.<br />
The future international monetary system has to meet three basic functions - liquidity,<br />
symmetry and stability in the international monetary relations, which requires a unique<br />
management style. It is necessary to revisit the basic principles of the functioning of market<br />
mechanism in conditions of a globalizing economy, since the latest trends such as<br />
liberalization, both economic and financial integration point to the fact that the market is not<br />
always able to regulate shocks, to which the global economy is exposed.<br />
References<br />
Aizenman, J., Chin, M. D. and Ito, H. 2008. “Assessing the Emerging Global Financial Architecture:<br />
Measuring the Trilemma’s Configurations over Time.” NBER Working Paper 14533, Cambridge<br />
December 2008<br />
Chinn, M. D. and Frankel, J. A. “The Euro May over the Next 15 <strong>Year</strong>s Surpass the Dollar as Leading<br />
International Currency.” NBER Working Paper 13909 . Cambridge April 2008, p. 4<br />
Kotlebová, J. and Chovancová, B. “Medzinárodné finančné centrá (zmeny v globálnej finančnej<br />
architektúre).“ Bratislava: IURA Edition 2010<br />
Lim, E. G. “The Euro’s Challenge to the Dollar: Different Views from Economists and Evidence form<br />
COFER (Currency Composition of Foreign Exchange Reserves) and other Data.” IMF Working<br />
Paper No 06/153, Washington: IMF, June 2006<br />
Obstfeld, M., Shambaugh, J. C. and Taylor, A. M. “Financial stability, the Trilemma, and International<br />
Reserves.” NBER Working Paper 14217. August 2008<br />
Thimann, Ch. “Global Roles of Currencies.” ECB Working Paper No 1031, Frankfurt: ECB, March<br />
2009, p. 10<br />
Woodford, M. “Globalization and Monetary Control.” NBER Working Paper 13329, Cambridge<br />
Workie, M. T. “Dynamika svetovej ekonomiky v roku 2006 a perspektívy na roky 2007 a 2008:<br />
globálny pohľad.“ In: Vývoj a perspektívy svetovej ekonomiky – prínos informačných technológií a hrozby<br />
klimatických zmien. Workie, M. T. Bratislava: EÚ SAV 2007, ISBN 978-80-7144-159-5, p. 29<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 6 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 19 March 2010
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
Differences Between Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices<br />
and Consumer Price Indices in Selected Countries<br />
Milecová Zuzana * , Technical University of Košice, Faculty of Economics, Slovakia<br />
UDC: 338.51 JEL: C12, E31, E58<br />
ABSTRACT – The aim of the paper is to analyse the differences between the harmonized indices of<br />
consumer prices and the national consumer price indices on the theoretical as well as on the practical<br />
levels. We are dealing with defining the differences between the indices not only in the euro area and<br />
in V4-countries, but also in Serbia. The main differences are geographic and population coverage and<br />
owner-occupied housing. For statistical testing we have used a paired two sample t-test, which allows<br />
us to test the null hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a mean value of zero. Out of<br />
all 21 realised tests we reject null-hypothesis in 14 cases.<br />
KEY WORDS: harmonized index of consumer prices, consumer price index<br />
Introduction<br />
The Consumer Price Indices (CPIs) constitute one of the key macroeconomic indicators,<br />
play an important role in monetary policy and economic analysis, are typically referred to in<br />
wage negotiations and often used for indexing prices in contracts. However, the underlying<br />
concepts and methods differ across countries. That is the reason why the Harmonized<br />
Indices of Consumer Prices (HICPs) were constructed, they facilitate the carrying out of<br />
international comparisons. In addition, the HICP serves as one of the convergence criteria to<br />
assess whether a member state is ready to join the euro area. By means of HICP the<br />
European Central Bank (ECB) defines price stability as a year-on-year increase in the HICP<br />
for the euro area of below but close to 2% over the medium term. The HICP has found an<br />
important place in the economy and has replaced the CPIs in several areas.<br />
On the other hand, the measurement of inflation in two different ways is after all<br />
confusing for consumers. That is one of the reasons why the significant differences between<br />
indices were not desirable. An example is the price progress in the Slovak Republic in<br />
August 2008. Inflation measurement by the CPI rises from 2.2 to 2.4 per cent and the HICP<br />
showed the decrease from 1.1 to 0.7 per cent year on year. We can not clearly say which<br />
index is correct. Simplest would be to have only one price index, but both have their<br />
justification in the economy. That is the reason why it is important to discuss the differences<br />
between the HICPs and CPIs.<br />
In each country the differences between these two indices were analysed. According to<br />
the results we can say that the most important differences are consumption expenditure<br />
coverage and treatment of owner-occupied housing (OOH).<br />
*<br />
E-mail: Zuzana.Milecova@tuke.sk
Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 71<br />
This paper deals with the differences between the HICPs and CPIs on both theoretical<br />
and practical levels. The aim is to analyse the differences between the used indices in the<br />
euro area and in V4-countries and also in Serbia. For statistical testing a paired two sample t-<br />
test was used. We tested the null hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a<br />
mean value of zero.<br />
Differences between indices in euro area<br />
Both HICPs and CPIs measure the changes in the prices over time of buying goods and<br />
services. The used calculation method is the same, Laspeyres chain index. The HICPs and<br />
CPIs are based on the same data sources, but they measure inflation with different concepts<br />
or methods. [9]<br />
In each member state analyses were realised to identify the differences between the<br />
national indices and the HICPs. For example in Netherlands the indices were compared by<br />
Leendert (2001), in Belgium by Druant (2001). The differences between the indices in Austria<br />
were analysed by Fluch and Rumler (2005). Ray Barrell, Simon Kirby and Rebecca Riley<br />
analysed the differences in UK and the results were published in the National Institute<br />
Economic Review in 2003. In the Slovak Republic Kosseyova and Doliak (2005) published the<br />
analysis of the differences. Ahnert and Branchi (2005) analysed the main differences in all<br />
European Union countries. Some information about the differences is available on the websides<br />
of individual statistical offices.<br />
With respect to these studies, the most important difference is the geographic and<br />
population coverage. The CPIs applying the residence concept reflect price changes in all<br />
goods and services purchased by consumers living in the country concerned, including their<br />
purchases abroad. By contrast, the domestic concept covers all consumption expenditure in<br />
the country concerned, regardless of who (residents or non-residents) purchased the goods<br />
and services. The HICPs apply the domestic concept. [7], [9] Decision about including the<br />
domestic concept is not random. ECB needs an index to monitor price changes in the<br />
territory of an individual member state, not in individual households. [8] On the other hand<br />
the choice of concept may have important impact on the differences between the indices in<br />
small countries like Luxemburg. We could find the differences between the indices in<br />
coverage of institutional household’s spending too. Most national indices follow only<br />
spending of private households. As an example we can mention Estonia, Latvia, Slovenia,<br />
Sweden, Belgium, Luxemburg and Portugal. [1]<br />
The differences are also in the number and coverage of items in goods and services<br />
basket, especially in subsidized areas, such as in health, social protection, education and<br />
insurance services. [8], [9] For example in France are healthy services excluded from the CPI.<br />
The Netherlands’s national price index follows some costs paid within healthy care and<br />
includes membership fees in sport and social clubs. The national index in Sweden includes<br />
some items of social protection. Games of chance are excluded from the CPI index for<br />
example in Italy and in Germany. The national index in Germany includes lottery tax and<br />
motor vehicle tax. [1]<br />
But the most important factor affecting the international comparability between the CPIs<br />
is the treatment of OOH. Sixteen of twenty seven European Union countries exclude OOH
72<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />
by calculating the CPIs. [7] OOH is included in the CPI for example in Denmark, Sweden,<br />
Germany, Ireland, Netherlands, Austria and Finland, but this countries use different<br />
approaches to cover OOH. In the HICP is OOH still excluded, because it has not yet been<br />
decided how owner-occupied housing should be covered. [1]<br />
The differences are formed by rounding the indices on individual aggregation levels too.<br />
[9] Some national statistical institutes use different aggregation formulas in their national<br />
CPI and HICP for aggregation at the lowest levels of the index. [7] The consumption basket<br />
and the expenditure shares of the items covered in the national CPIs and the HICPs may be<br />
updated at different intervals. [7] France, Italy, Luxemburg, Portugal, Estonia, Latvia,<br />
Lithuania, Slovenia, Sweden and UK update weights in consumer basket for calculating the<br />
national CPIs annually. The other member states review basket weights mostly every five<br />
years. Updates interval in Greece is as late as six years. [1] Different update interval leads to<br />
the fact that there are many new goods and services which are in basket of the HICP, but the<br />
CPI does not cover them yet. For example organic food, air tickets, mobile phones and<br />
computers, were covered in the HICP sooner than in the CPI in Belgium. [6] The methods<br />
used to estimate prices for goods when their quality is changing over time are differ across<br />
countries. The differences are in coverage of price reductions during winter and summer<br />
sales periods. There may be also differences between the national classifications used for the<br />
CPI and the harmonized classification of the HICP. [8]<br />
The progress of the HICPs and the CPIs is shown in Picture 1 in the annex.<br />
Table 1 Differences Between Indices in Euro Area<br />
Belgium<br />
Germany<br />
Ireland<br />
Greece<br />
Spain<br />
France<br />
Italy<br />
Luxembourg<br />
Malta<br />
Netherlands<br />
Austria<br />
mean variance p-value<br />
HICP 1.97 1.53<br />
CPI 1.97 1.52<br />
1.000000<br />
HICP 1.49 0.70<br />
CPI 1.46 0.57<br />
0.168871<br />
HICP 2.91 2.80<br />
CPI 3.10 6.35<br />
0.069507<br />
HICP 3.26 0.95<br />
CPI 3.25 0.94<br />
0.844333<br />
HICP 2.84 1.51<br />
CPI 2.89 1.52<br />
0.041505<br />
HICP 1.68 0.83<br />
CPI 1.55 0.70<br />
7.38E-23<br />
HICP 2.26 0.47<br />
CPI 2.21 0.46<br />
0.022933<br />
HICP 2.48 2.19<br />
CPI 2.09 1.08<br />
1.83E-11<br />
HICP 2.64 1.56<br />
CPI 2.44 1.67<br />
0.003881<br />
HICP 2.24 1.40<br />
CPI 2.14 0.83<br />
0.00124<br />
HICP 1.70 0.77<br />
CPI 1.80 0.85<br />
9.75E-06
Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 73<br />
Portugal<br />
Slovenia<br />
Slovakia<br />
Cyprus<br />
Finland<br />
HICP 2.58 1.69<br />
CPI 2.64 1.55<br />
HICP 5.34 7.20<br />
CPI 5.31 7.15<br />
HICP 5.90 13.76<br />
CPI 6.11 12.51<br />
HICP 2.51 2.42<br />
CPI 2.65 2.01<br />
HICP 1.75 1.12<br />
CPI 1.72 1.62<br />
Sources: Eurostat, national data, own calculations<br />
0.001239<br />
0.008323<br />
9.46E-10<br />
0.000706<br />
0.513191<br />
For statistical testing of the differences between the indices we used a paired two sample<br />
t-test. We have assumed normal distribution, which was verified by visual methods. We<br />
tested the null hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a mean value of zero on<br />
significance level 5%. If the p-value is less than 0.05, we reject the null hypothesis and if the<br />
p-value is more than 0.05, we cannot reject the null hypothesis. The results of this analysis<br />
are in Table 1.<br />
We tested data from January 1998 to October 2009 for all sixteen countries, which<br />
gradually accessed the euro area (142 observations). In just five cases we could not reject the<br />
null hypothesis (Belgium, Germany, Ireland, Greece and Finland). According to this analysis,<br />
we could not clearly say that there are no significant differences between the national CPIs<br />
and the HICPs in the euro area.<br />
Ahnert and Branchi (2005) analysed the differences between the HICPs and the<br />
individual CPIs. The aim of their research was to prove that the differences are not<br />
significant and there is a decreasing trend. To confirm this hypothesis, authors draw up an<br />
index as simple weighted average of the CPIs of the euro area member states. The country weights are<br />
equal to the countries share of Household Final Monetary Consumption Expenditure<br />
(HFMCE) in total. This index was compared with the official Monetary Union Index of<br />
Consumer Prices (MUICP), which is configured by Eurostat of the HICPs of the member states<br />
participating in the EMU. [1] This analysis inspired us to repeat calculations of current<br />
information and review present situation.<br />
Von der Lippe (2001) states the compiation method of the MUICP index as follows [17]:<br />
k<br />
k<br />
= ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞ ⎛ ⎞<br />
⎜ ⎟ ⋅⎜<br />
⎟ ⋅ ⋅⎜<br />
∑<br />
k<br />
M<br />
0 t ∑cm1H<br />
m1<br />
∑cm2H<br />
m2<br />
... cmt<br />
H<br />
mt<br />
⎟ . (1),<br />
⎝ m=<br />
1 ⎠ ⎝ m=<br />
1 ⎠ ⎝ m=<br />
1 ⎠<br />
where M stands for the MUICP, H for the individual HICPs, cm represents the country<br />
weights, k the individual member states (m = 1, ..., k) and t is for the time. Hmt is then the link<br />
(from t-1 to t) for country m. Formula (1) represents time series of the MUICP, which could<br />
by written as follows:<br />
M<br />
0 t<br />
= M<br />
1<br />
⋅ M<br />
2<br />
⋅...<br />
⋅ M t<br />
. (2),<br />
Greece accessed the euro area in the year 2001 and the MUICP index has been extended,<br />
as shown in Formula (3):
74<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />
k<br />
⎛ *<br />
⎞<br />
M<br />
0,<br />
t+ 1<br />
= M<br />
0t<br />
⋅⎜∑cm,<br />
t+<br />
1H<br />
m,<br />
t+<br />
1<br />
+ ck<br />
+ 1, t+<br />
1H<br />
k + 1, t+<br />
1<br />
⎟ . (3),<br />
⎝ m=<br />
1<br />
⎠<br />
M<br />
0 , t+ 1<br />
= M<br />
1<br />
⋅ M<br />
2<br />
⋅... ⋅ M<br />
t+<br />
1<br />
. (4),<br />
where t+1 states for the year 2001. Star marks out the new country weights system after<br />
access of a new member state. The MUICP has been extended progressively with access of<br />
individual member states to the euro area. The index includes sixteen countries till today.<br />
Necessary data are published by individual national statistical offices, OECD and<br />
Eurostat. We found the differences of up to 1.3 percentage points between data published by<br />
OECD and individual statistical offices. The same data are published only for Germany,<br />
France and Italy. For our model we used data published by statistical offices of member<br />
states, because they are revised. The country weights used in individual years are published<br />
on the web-side of Eurostat.<br />
Figure 2. MUICP versus Aggregated CPIs<br />
Sources: Eurostat, national data, own calculations<br />
The result of calculations is shown in Figure 2. We can confirm that the differences<br />
between the MUICP and the index composed from the CPIs have been diminishing over<br />
time. On the other hand, we tried to use the statistical test, to identify if the difference<br />
between the indices is significant or not.<br />
Table 2. Differences between MUICP and Aggregated CPIs<br />
Euro Area<br />
mean variance p-value<br />
MUICP 1.96 0.67<br />
0.000184<br />
Aggregated CPIs 1.92 0.63<br />
Sources: [1], Eurostat, national data, own calculations
Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 75<br />
For statistical testing we used a paired sample t-test as in the previous case. We analysed<br />
data from January 1998 to October 2009. Considering the fact that the p-value of analysed<br />
data is less than 0.05, we decided to reject null-hypothesis that the difference between the<br />
indices has a mean value of zero.<br />
Differences between Indices in V4-Countries<br />
The differences between the HICPs and the national CPIs in V4-countries are collected by<br />
Eurostat and the statistical offices of the individual countries.<br />
The Hungarian national CPI includes approximately 900 items, which are observed in 35-<br />
150 outlets depending on their character. Altogether more than seventy-five thousand prices<br />
are collected monthly. [11] The main differences between the indices in Hungary concern the<br />
coverage of owner-occupied housing and games of chance which are excluded from the<br />
HICP and the expenditure of foreign visitors which are excluded from the national CPI. The<br />
national CPI does not monitor development of expenditure of institutional households. The<br />
weights are updated in Hungary every year, but weights for the HICP are updated every 5<br />
years, only if required, review is made annually. [10], [11]<br />
The number of price representatives in consumer basket for the CPI calculation in the<br />
Czech Republic (CR) is 729. Consumer prices are surveyed in 35 selected districts in the CR<br />
and in the Capital of Prague. Consumer basket represents approximately 55,000 prices to be<br />
surveyed monthly. [4], [13] Regarding the differences between the HICP and the national<br />
CPI in the Czech Republic, consumption expenditure of non-residents in the economic<br />
territory of the country is included in the HICP, but excluded from the national CPI.<br />
Institutional households are excluded from the CPI, unlike from the HICP. Expenditure of<br />
investments in the owner-occupied houses (major repairs) is included in the national CPI,<br />
but excluded from the HICP. The purchase of the house itself is excluded from both indices.<br />
[10]<br />
In Poland there were about 1,800 representative consumer goods and services chosen for<br />
completing the CPI in 2009. On average, there are about 292 thousand prices collected each<br />
month in 209 price survey regions. [3] Regarding the differences between the HICP and the<br />
national consumer price index in Poland, institutional households and consumption<br />
expenditure of non-residents in the economic territory of the country are included in the<br />
HICP, but excluded from the national CPI. Games of chance are included in the national CPI,<br />
but excluded from the HICP. Another contributory factor to the differences between the<br />
HICP and the national consumer price index concerns the use of different weights. The CPI<br />
is calculated with the use of weights from the Household Budget Survey for the previous<br />
year, while the HICP utilizes weights from the National Accounts. Owner-occupied housing<br />
is excluded from the HICP and from the CPI, too. Weights for the CPI are reviewed annually.<br />
[10]<br />
The Slovak CPI covers approximately 90 % of all households and the calculation is based<br />
on consumer basket with 709 representative items. Prices of goods and services are collected<br />
in about 13,400 outlets and business premises. Number of price quotations is about 90,000.<br />
[16] The main difference between the HICP and the national CPI in the Slovak Republic<br />
concerns the coverage of owner-occupied housing, in particular imputed rents and
76<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />
expenditure on major maintenance and repair which are excluded from the HICP. The<br />
weights for the CPI are reviewed annually. [10]<br />
The progress of the HICPs and the national CPIs in V4-countries is shown in Figure 3.<br />
Figure 3. Progress of CPIs and HICPs in V4 countries<br />
20,0<br />
18,0<br />
16,0<br />
14,0<br />
12,0<br />
10,0<br />
8,0<br />
6,0<br />
4,0<br />
2,0<br />
0,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
16,0<br />
14,0<br />
12,0<br />
10,0<br />
8,0<br />
6,0<br />
4,0<br />
2,0<br />
0,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
Hungary<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
Poland<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
16,0<br />
14,0<br />
12,0<br />
10,0<br />
8,0<br />
6,0<br />
4,0<br />
2,0<br />
0,0<br />
-2,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
18,0<br />
16,0<br />
14,0<br />
12,0<br />
10,0<br />
8,0<br />
6,0<br />
4,0<br />
2,0<br />
0,0<br />
-2,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
Czech Republic<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
Sources: Eurostat and individual statistical offices<br />
Slovakia<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
The introduction of the HICP is an advantage in terms of convergence criteria and<br />
monetary policy, especially in the Slovak Republic. The inflation measured by method of the<br />
HICP is less than inflation measured by method of the CPI. The reason for this progress is<br />
that the CPI includes the OOH, which significantly increased in last months. The OOH was<br />
recently monitored only as monthly payments for repairs and maintenance of owner<br />
occupied apartments calculated per an apartment’s square meter floor (regular payments to<br />
so-called repairs fund). The government decided to support insulating homes by interest-free<br />
loans within anti-crisis measures. Residents began to use them massively. This has led to the<br />
increase of payments to repair fund. Significant increase of the CPI and its deviation in the<br />
HICP is not due to inflation, but due to numerous projects of insulating homes. This progress<br />
forced statistical office to change the method to calculate the OOH. The repair fund is only<br />
60% of the OOH today, the other 40% are other items related to housing. Data of the CPI<br />
were revised retroactively from January 2009. [12]<br />
For statistical testing we used also a paired two sample t-test, as in the previous cases.
Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 77<br />
Table 3. Differences Between Indices in V4-Countries<br />
mean variance p-value<br />
Hungary<br />
HICP 7.16 11.13<br />
CPI 7.17 10.89<br />
0.844968<br />
Poland<br />
HICP 4.59 12.49<br />
CPI 4.54 12.74<br />
0.030217<br />
Czech Republic<br />
HICP 3.16 7.97<br />
CPI 3.44 8.61<br />
8.38E-21<br />
Sources: Eurostat, national data, own calculations<br />
We tested data from January 1998 to October 2009 for V4-countries (the analysis of<br />
Slovakia is in Table 1). In just one case we could not reject the null hypothesis (Hungary). In<br />
the other three cases we reject the null hypothesis, that the difference between the indices has<br />
a mean value of zero. According to this analysis, we could not clearly say that there are no<br />
significant differences between the national CPIs and the HICPs in V4-countries.<br />
Consumer price indices in the Republic of Serbia<br />
In the Republic of Serbia two retail price indices were used on national level until January<br />
2003. The first, the Retail Price Index (RPI) is used as national inflation measure and deflator<br />
of output and assets. Retail prices are the prices that retail outlets, individual agricultural<br />
producers and service providers apply in selling their products and services to end users,<br />
including the turnover tax. The second, the Consumer Price Index, is a type of cost of living<br />
index and is used for wages, pensions and other social benefits revaluation. The weights for<br />
the RPI are based on structure of retail turnover of goods and services. The weights for the<br />
CPI were calculated from structure of household consumption. [5] The national CPI in Serbia<br />
has different classification from COICOP and follows seven sub-categories of goods and<br />
services. Food; Tobacco and beverages; Clothes and footwear; Housing and household<br />
operations; Hygiene and health care; Education, culture and entertainment; Vehicles and<br />
services. [7] Serbian national statistical office started to calculate the CPI by COICOP in<br />
January 2007. [5] This index presents a special retail prices index that is being calculated<br />
according to the methodology that is harmonized with recommendations for retail prices<br />
index calculation in the European Union. CPI-COICOP is comparable with the HICP of the<br />
European Union. [15]<br />
Statistical office of the Republic of Serbia has published monthly series of indices on the<br />
web-side from January 2000 till now. For better demonstrations of the differences between<br />
the mentioned indices, we decided to construct Figure 4 from shorter time series (from<br />
January 2003 to October 2009).
78<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />
Figure 4. Progresses of CPI, CPI-COICOP and RPI in the Republic of Serbia (y-o-y)<br />
20<br />
18<br />
16<br />
14<br />
12<br />
10<br />
8<br />
6<br />
4<br />
2<br />
0<br />
0103<br />
0603<br />
1103<br />
0404<br />
0904<br />
0205<br />
CPI-COICOP<br />
CPI<br />
RPI<br />
0705<br />
1205<br />
0506<br />
1006<br />
0307<br />
0807<br />
0108<br />
0608<br />
1108<br />
0409<br />
0909<br />
Sources: Statistical office of the Republic of Serbia<br />
The main difference between the CPI-COICOP and the Index of Retail Prices is coverage,<br />
because the list of products and services also includes rent, financial services, educational<br />
services as well as catering trade services. The indices use different weight systems and<br />
classification by calculating. Also the formula for the index calculation at the lowest level of<br />
aggregating is different for the CPI-COICOP and for the RPI too. [15]<br />
Table 4. Differences Between RPI and CPI-COICOP<br />
The Republic of Serbia<br />
mean variance p-value<br />
RPI 8.89 5.19<br />
0.894883<br />
CPI-COICOP 8.93 11.97<br />
Sources: Statistical office of the Republic of Serbia, own calculations<br />
For statistical testing we have used a paired sample t-test as in the previous cases. We<br />
tested data from January 2007, when the CPI-COICOP was introduced in to the practice to<br />
the present (October 2009). Considering that the p-value of analysed data is more than 0.05,<br />
we cannot reject null-hypothesis that the difference between the indices has a mean value of<br />
zero. We could test only the 35 observations this time.<br />
The RPI was the official measure of inflation in Serbia for a long time, but from the start<br />
of 2009 the CPI became the main inflation indicator, which is targeted by the National Bank<br />
of Serbia. Their aim is to have measurements for inflation comparable with EU. [14]<br />
Time series of the HICP for Serbia are not available so far.<br />
Conclusion<br />
The harmonized index of consumer prices replaced the national consumer price index in<br />
several areas. The harmonized index is used as one of the convergence criteria, which
Milecová, Z., Differences Between Harmonized Indices, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No, 1-2, 70-82) 79<br />
assesses the readiness of a member state to join the euro area. European central bank defines<br />
price stability through the harmonized index of consumer prices. But in economy there are<br />
differences between the indices. The main differences are geographic and population<br />
coverage and owner-occupied housing.<br />
For statistical testing we used a paired sample t-test, which allows testing if the difference<br />
between the indices has a mean value of zero. We tested data from January 1998 to October<br />
2009 from all euro area member states and V4-countries. From 19 realised tests in the<br />
countries of the European Union, we cannot reject the null-hypothesis in only six cases<br />
(Belgium, Germany, Greece, Ireland, Finland and Hungary). In the other cases we had nullhypothesis<br />
rejected on a significance level of 5 per cent. Considering the realised analysis we<br />
could not clearly say that the differences between the indices are not significant.<br />
In the next step we have drawn up an aggregated CPI index. This analysis confirmed that<br />
the differences between the indices have been diminishing over time. On the other hand, the<br />
statistical test did not confirm the null-hypothesis.<br />
In the Republic of Serbia three retail price indices are followed; the Retail Price Index, the<br />
Consumer Price Index by national structure and the Consumer Price Index by COICOP.<br />
While the National Bank of Serbia used the Retail price index as the main indicator until<br />
December 2008, from the start of 2009 it is targeting the CPI-COICOP. Considering the<br />
statistical analysis we cannot reject the null-hypothesis that the difference between the<br />
indices has a mean value of zero.<br />
References<br />
[1] AHNERT, H., BRANCHI, M. The HICP as an anchor for European consumer price statistics<br />
[online]. 2005 [cit. 2009-12-21] available on the Internet:<br />
.<br />
[2] ASTIN, J. The European Union Harmonized indices of consumer prices (HICP) [online]. 1999<br />
[cit. 2010-01-16] available on the Internet:<br />
.<br />
[3] Central statistical office of Poland Consumer Price Index [online] 2009 [cit. 2010-01-15]<br />
available on the Internet:<br />
.<br />
[4] Czech Statistical office Consumer Price Indices - User’s methodological manual [online]. 2010<br />
[cit. 2010-01-06] available on the Internet: .<br />
[5] JANKOVIC, M. Price collection in unstable market conditions [online]. 2006 [cit. 2010-01-17]<br />
available on the Internet:<br />
.<br />
[6] DRUANT, M. Belgian HICP: A Major Step Forward in the accurate measurement of inflation<br />
[online]. 2002 [cit. 2010-01-16] available on the Internet: .<br />
ISSN 1725-1338.<br />
[7] ECB Understanding price developments and consumer price indices in South-Eastern Europe<br />
[online]. 2007 [cit. 2010-01-16] available on the Internet:<br />
. ISSN 1725-6534.
80<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 70-82)<br />
[8] Eurostat HICP-CPI Differences [online]. [cit. 2009-12-21] available on the Internet:<br />
.<br />
[9] Eurostat Harmonized indices of consumer prices (HICPs): A short Guide for Users [online].<br />
2004 [cit. 2009-12-21] available on the Internet:<br />
.<br />
[10] Eurostat Information Note on the Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices, Compliance<br />
Monitoring [online]. 2008, 2009 [cit. 2010-01-12] available on the Internet:<br />
Anex 1<br />
Picture 1. Progress of Harmonized Indices of Consumer Prices and National Consumer Price Indices in Euro Zone Member States<br />
Belgium<br />
-4<br />
-2<br />
0<br />
2<br />
4<br />
6<br />
8<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M10<br />
1999M07<br />
2000M04<br />
2001M01<br />
2001M10<br />
2002M07<br />
2003M04<br />
2004M01<br />
2004M10<br />
2005M07<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M01<br />
2007M10<br />
2008M07<br />
2009M04<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Germany<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Ireland<br />
-8,0<br />
-6,0<br />
-4,0<br />
-2,0<br />
0,0<br />
2,0<br />
4,0<br />
6,0<br />
8,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Greece<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Spain<br />
-2,0<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
France<br />
-2,0<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Italy<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Cyprus<br />
-2,0<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
7,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Luxemburg<br />
-2,0<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
7,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Malta<br />
-2,0<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
7,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Netherlands<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Austria<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP
Portugal<br />
-3,0<br />
-2,0<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Slovenia<br />
-2,0<br />
0,0<br />
2,0<br />
4,0<br />
6,0<br />
8,0<br />
10,0<br />
12,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Slovakia<br />
-2,0<br />
0,0<br />
2,0<br />
4,0<br />
6,0<br />
8,0<br />
10,0<br />
12,0<br />
14,0<br />
16,0<br />
18,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Finland<br />
-2,0<br />
-1,0<br />
0,0<br />
1,0<br />
2,0<br />
3,0<br />
4,0<br />
5,0<br />
6,0<br />
1998M01<br />
1998M12<br />
1999M11<br />
2000M10<br />
2001M09<br />
2002M08<br />
2003M07<br />
2004M06<br />
2005M05<br />
2006M04<br />
2007M03<br />
2008M02<br />
2009M01<br />
CPI<br />
HICP<br />
Source: Eurostat and individual statistical offices
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence Employment?<br />
Vokorokosová Renatá * , Technical University of Košice, Faculty of Economics,<br />
Department for Banking and Investment, Slovakia<br />
UDC: 331.526 JEL: J31; J24<br />
ABSTRACT – Greater number of foreign working studies does confirm the theoretical assumption<br />
that minimum wage increases negatively change the amount of employed people. Contrary to these,<br />
there is, however, a completely different persuasion on this issue among some economists. This article<br />
picks out minimum wage as an important part of employment research investigating two files; the<br />
number of working people aged 15 – 64 and all working labours.<br />
KEY WORDS: working force, minimum wage, ageing index, labour productivity<br />
Introduction<br />
Although there are several factors (like economic growth, foreign investments, education<br />
of workers, average wage, living wage 1 ), effecting the number of employed persons,<br />
discussions are, however, held at the most about the relation between minimum wage 2 and<br />
employment just on when setting in new level of minimum wage. Among majority of<br />
employment and minimum wage empirical literature 3 (e g. Brown, Gilroy and Kohen 1981;<br />
Neumark and Wascher 1992; Card and Krueger 1994; Welch 1976; OECD 1998; Eriksson and<br />
Pytlikova 2004) there are papers testing the relationship between minimum wage and<br />
employment of teens and young generation, skilled workers (e. g. Brown, Gilroy and Kohen<br />
1983; Ragan 1977).<br />
Test results for minimum wage influences upon employment rest on existing theoretical<br />
models. There is a basic competitive model (neoclassical theory accepts that employment<br />
declines when minimum wage rises; if the level of minimum wage exceeds the market<br />
clearing wage, supply of labours increases while demand declines), followed by alternative –<br />
modified specifications. The basic competitive model posits a labour market with many<br />
identical companies and homogeneous workers (Zavodny 1998). It rests on the behaviour of<br />
a labour force so that the additional unit of labour takes the work only if wages are<br />
enhanced. Thus the value of the last unit of labour (marginal product) declines as labour<br />
increases. However, this approach (model) does not consider any differences as to ability,<br />
experience or knowledge of labour forces (Samson 2008).<br />
*<br />
Address: Nemcovej 32, 040 01 Košice, Slovakia, e-mail: Renata.Vokorokosova@tuke.sk<br />
1<br />
Living wage: a wage which is enough to buy the necessary things in daily life (Longman Dictionary,<br />
1978).<br />
2<br />
Minimum wage: the lowest wage permitted by law, by a rule, or by agreement, for certain work<br />
(Longman Dictionary 1978).<br />
3<br />
In Slovakia there is a need of empirical research papers devoted to minimum wage and employment.<br />
For more information see e. g. Vokorokosová 2008; Barošová 2008; Eriksson and Pytlikova 2004.
84<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />
On the contrary, alternative or sometimes called dynamic models 4 (e.g. substitution<br />
model of labour force) focused on two types of labours: skilled and no skilled and compare<br />
the level of minimum wage with that of a market clearing wage 5 . Skilled and unskilled<br />
workers if being employed, one can suppose, that minimum wage changes increase the<br />
number of skilled workers employed while decrease the number of unskilled workers in the<br />
working process. Monopsony model – another alternative model denotes a single employer<br />
that, if requiring additional unit of labour has to increase the wage levels of all his workers.<br />
The aim of this paper is to examine the impact of minimum wage changes upon the<br />
employment status of employed people regardless the age as well as of that aged 15 – 64. The<br />
paper proceeds as follows: section two provides a brief history of minimum wage relating to<br />
Slovakian legal environment. Section three puts details to empirical arrangement and the<br />
outcomes. Section four concludes.<br />
History of minimum wage<br />
Minimum wage was for the first time approved in New Zeeland (1896) later in Australia<br />
(1899), followed by Great Britain (1909). In 1912 the state Massachusetts in the USA<br />
appointed the minimum wage to women and children work. Minimum wage was legally<br />
introduced in the USA in 1938, in France in 1950 and in Holland in 1968.<br />
Within the EU setting the minimum wage is in the competence of individual economies.<br />
According to Eurostat and The European Foundation for the Improvement of Living and<br />
Working Conditions there are 20 countries which introduced some kind of national<br />
minimum wage (set legally or through collective bargaining). Six countries (Denmark,<br />
Finland, Germany, Austria, Italy, and Sweden) approved minimum-wage tariff settled in<br />
sector collective bargaining. e. g. Cyprus introduced the minimum wage for six selected<br />
professions (Barošová 2008).<br />
Minimum wage in Slovakia<br />
Minimum wage along with mechanism for its setting are in Slovakia defined in the Law<br />
633/2007, Collection of Laws, on Minimum wage, involved in Law 354/2008, Collection of<br />
Laws, and in Law 460/2008, Collection of Laws 6 . Thus in Slovakia, according to the latest<br />
version of the Law, the minimum wage level is for the appropriate calendar year appointed<br />
by the government of the Slovak Republic. For individual sectors, it is, however, allowed to<br />
settle up a higher minimum wage level than that legally defined.<br />
The sum of the minimum wage is adjusted owing to the economic and social conditions of<br />
two previous years coming just before the calendar year for which the level of minimum<br />
4<br />
Dynamic models do not consider negative impacts of minimum wage changes on employment due<br />
to e. g. substitution effects among workers regarding their qualification.<br />
5<br />
Market clearing wage is the result of an upward-sloping labour supply curve and a downwardsloping<br />
labour demand curve. The market labour supply curve is upward sloping; individual firms<br />
are however, facing a horizontal labour supply curve.<br />
6<br />
Introducing a new law on minimum wage the hitherto legislative regulations became void. The<br />
previous law set reduced rates towards selected groups of employees titled to lower rate of 50 % and<br />
75 % from the minimum wage.
Vokorokosová, R., Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90) 85<br />
wage is to be determined. The sum of monthly minimum wage for the coming calendar year is<br />
adjusted according to the national average wage index (Law on Minimum Wage in Slovakia,<br />
current version).<br />
Description of model and data<br />
Models based upon time series usually apply for lagged variables (e. g. minimum wage)<br />
assuming that a certain time has to pass since the effects of minimum wage changes can<br />
occur (Brown, Gilroy and Kohen 1981). Lags are usually set empirically (Hatrák 2007).<br />
Standard statistical model takes a form<br />
k<br />
Y<br />
t<br />
= ∑ β<br />
i<br />
X<br />
ti<br />
+ γT<br />
+<br />
i = 1<br />
u<br />
t<br />
(1)<br />
whereas Yt is employment to population ratio, Xti stands for relevant variables e g. minimum<br />
wage, price index, unit labour costs, etc; T is a time variable, ut is random error term, t stands<br />
for time, β1, ..., βk are parameters, which ceteris paribus indicate relation between<br />
independent variables and dependent variable, γ points out relation between trend variable<br />
and employment. In this article the testing of effects of minimum wage 7 (see values of Kaitz<br />
index on graph 1) for changes upon employment 8 (see graph 2) rests on the standard<br />
statistical model (1) using quarterly data (1996 q2 – 2009q1) from the database of the<br />
Statistical Office of the Slovak Republic (SOSR).<br />
Graph 1. Kaitz index<br />
Reference: Graphical layout based upon SOSR data.<br />
7 Variable Minimum wage is expressed as proportion of minimum wage to national average wage.<br />
8<br />
Employment denotes employment rate which is the ratio of the working labour force<br />
currently employed to the total population in given age. The Organization for Economic Co-operation<br />
and Development defines the employment rate as the percentage of the working age population (ages<br />
15 to 64 in most OECD countries) who are currently employed.
86<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />
Models (Model 1: Age groups together; Model 2: Ages 15 – 64) meet assumptions of<br />
classical regression. Variables are integrated of first order I (1). They are co integrated, that<br />
means, their linear combination is I (0), and it is stationary. Lags of exogenous variables were<br />
set empirically.<br />
It is evident that the value of Kaitz index expressed as a share of minimum wage to<br />
average wage level in national economy under Slovak conditions moved from about 33 % at<br />
the beginning of the observed period to about 42 % in the first quarter of the year 2009. Value<br />
of the Kaitz index varies along with the level of average wage in national economy in<br />
corresponding quarter. The level of minimum wage is set forth in advance and remains<br />
unchanged for the entire year in Slovakia.<br />
Regression (2) expresses the relation between minimum wage and employment of both of<br />
the investigated structures - files (one that encompasses all employed people; second that<br />
involves workers in the age 15 - 64) along with a control variable - labour productivity.<br />
Y β + β X + β X 2 + β Y + u ,<br />
(2)<br />
t = 0 1 1t<br />
−1<br />
2 t −1<br />
3 t −1<br />
t<br />
whereas Yt is a time series expressing rate of employment of observed file; X1t is a share of<br />
minimum wage to average wage; X2t denotes labour productivity; ß0,1,2,3, express parameters;<br />
ut denotes random error term. Tables 1, 2 present the results – values of coefficients.<br />
Graph 2. Employment rate<br />
Reference: Graphical layout based upon SOSR data.<br />
Employment rate of observed files seems to be quite stable although some changes<br />
occurred during 1998 and 2003. A disemployment between 1998 and 2001 was a result of<br />
reforms provided for e. g. public finances, taxes, social system and public administration. In<br />
the following period, there was an increasing demand for labour mainly in those companies<br />
absorbing foreign capital that flew e. g. to automobile industry and attendant establishments.<br />
Peculiar for 2001 was the increased number of economically active population year-on-year<br />
by 44 800 people. <strong>Year</strong>-on-year rose the employment by 22 000 people (Domonkos and
Vokorokosová, R., Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90) 87<br />
Pániková 2007). In addition to this one must also take into consideration the demographic<br />
changes in the economy. The share of inhabitants at the post productive age to that of pre<br />
productive age (see graph 3: Ageing index9 of inhabitants together; men; women) keeps<br />
rising.<br />
Graph 3. Ageing index<br />
Reference: Graphical layout based upon SOSR data.<br />
The ageing of inhabitants tends to increase as the values of the ageing index becomes<br />
larger for all observed files (men and women; men; women) achieving the highest values for<br />
women category (its value changed from 108.92 % in 1996 to 184.21 % in 2008). From 2007 to<br />
2008 the value of the index increased in the corresponding file (women) for about 7.31<br />
percentage point.<br />
Ageing index for men finished in 1996 at the value of 55.07 % while in 2008 at the value of<br />
85.44 %. In 1996 the value of the ageing index in the category of men and women together<br />
obtained about 81 % while in 2008 it got about 134 %. So it seems that in 2008 there were<br />
about 134 inhabitants at the post productive age coming to 100 inhabitants at the pre<br />
productive age (0-14).<br />
The number of inhabitants decreases in general, however, as death rate declines and the<br />
length of life becomes longer; there are more and more older people at the post productive<br />
age (over 65 years). This is, however, a general tendency also in other countries. This may<br />
result in the shortage of labours necessary for a certain type of economic sector (Puchá 2005).<br />
A possible solution might be the inflow of foreign labours which could reduce existing gap<br />
on the labour market.<br />
9<br />
Ageing index is calculated as the number of persons 60 years old or over per hundred persons under<br />
´+<br />
65<br />
age 15. In Slovakia it takes following form: Ai = ∗100<br />
.<br />
0 −14
88<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />
Table 1. Values of coefficients and standard errors. LS (Least Squares)<br />
Variables<br />
Model 1 (Age groups together: men<br />
and women)<br />
Constant -8.413664**<br />
(2.995541)<br />
MW_AW(-1) 0.144191**<br />
(0.028492)<br />
ER(-1) 1.077487<br />
(0.048238)<br />
PROD(-1) -0.067289**<br />
(0.028022)<br />
R 2 0.931<br />
N number of observations 52<br />
Elasticity<br />
0.102<br />
-0.047<br />
Numbers in parentheses denote standard errors, R 2 – coefficient of determination.<br />
**Significance at 5 %<br />
Investigation results (see table 1) of minimum wage changes (expressed as a share of<br />
minimum wage - MW - to average wage – AW -) and their effects upon employment status<br />
(expressed as employment rate - ER - of men and women) did not confirm a negative<br />
relation between these two variables. There is a negative connection between employment<br />
and labour productivity – PROD. If the share of minimum wage to average wage changes by<br />
1 % 10 , the employment rate increases by about 0.102 %. All variables are used in a lag form.<br />
Any changes in minimum wage/average wage or in labour productivity tend to take some<br />
time until their effects become evident. The lags of variables were set empirically (for one<br />
period of observation that is one quarter).<br />
Table 2 .Values of coefficients and standard errors. LS (Least Squares)<br />
Variables<br />
Model 2<br />
(Age groups 15 – 64)<br />
Constant -9.997505<br />
(3.552217)<br />
MW_AW(-1) 0.168097**<br />
(0.033406)<br />
ER15_64(-1) 1.081321**<br />
(0.049301)<br />
PROD(-1) -0.080012<br />
(0.032629)<br />
R 2 0.929<br />
N number of observations 52<br />
Elasticity<br />
0.119<br />
-0.056<br />
Numbers in parentheses denote standard errors, R 2 – coefficient of determination.<br />
** Significance at 5 %<br />
dY X<br />
10<br />
Based upon calculations of arc elasticity which takes the following form: E Y / X<br />
= * .<br />
dX Y
Vokorokosová, R., Do Minimum Wage Changes Influence, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90) 89<br />
There is a positive relation between minimum wage changes and employment rate of<br />
labours aged 15 – 64 (see table 2). Like in previous model (model 1), a negative relation was<br />
proved among employment rate of corresponding file and labour productivity. A 1 %<br />
increase of minimum wage/average wage in national economy seems to increase the<br />
employment rate of the file under review by about 0.119 % while a 1 % increase of labour<br />
productivity tends to decline the employment rate of labours aged 15 – 64 by about 0.056 %.<br />
Conclusion<br />
Outcomes obtained in this paper do not confirm the theoretical assumption that<br />
minimum wage changes have disemployment effect. In both of the files observed<br />
(employment of men and women regardless age; employment of labours aged 15 – 64) the<br />
positive effect of minimum wage/average wage changes to employment status were found<br />
out. If economy is rising, minimum wage can be rising too. This in fact motivates people<br />
working even those voluntary unemployed (discouraged) ones. As there is a lack of<br />
empirical studies in Slovakia coping with minimum wage influences upon employment, this<br />
article may reduce the existing gap in this research and be useful for institutions having<br />
decision right about minimum wage settings. Pros and cons of minimum wage in economy<br />
are often discussed, but a certain level of minimum wage can protect domestic labour market<br />
from the outflow of domestic labours to foreign countries mainly in the neighbourhood<br />
where they can earn minimum wage higher than it is in their domestic country. It can even<br />
prevent the labour market from the inflow of a cheap labour from abroad. Nowadays it is<br />
not about abolishing the minimum wage in countries where it already exists, but it is often<br />
discussed in economies which still do not have any kind of guarantee of minimum earning.<br />
Beside other advantages it presents a country´s interest to handle the issue of poverty and<br />
willingness to ensure a certain level of living also for those which earn the lowest amount of<br />
money. Since there are still different opinions on how the minimum wage changes effect<br />
employment, working papers relating to this issue in different countries are a good source of<br />
valuable information for all subjects involved in this matter.<br />
References<br />
Barošová, M. 2008: Fungovanie a vývoj minimálnej mzdy v Slovenskej republike. FÓRUM SOCIÁLNÍ<br />
POLITIKY 5/2008.<br />
Brown, Ch. - Gilroy, C. - Kohen, A. 1981: Effects of the Minimum Wage on Employment and<br />
Unemployment. <strong>Journal</strong> of Economic Literature. Vol. XX.<br />
Brown, Ch. - Gilroy, C. - Kohen, A. 1983: Time-Series Evidence of the Effect of the Minimum Wage on<br />
Youth Employment, <strong>Journal</strong> of Human Resources. .<br />
Card, D. - Krueger, A. 1994: Minimum wages and employment: A case study of the fast-food industry<br />
in New Jersey and Pennsylvania. American Economic Review.<br />
Domonkos,T. – Pániková, L. 2007: Analýza a modelovanie dopytu po práci v podmienkach slovenskej<br />
ekonomiky. INFOSTAT, Bratislava.<br />
Eriksson, T. – Pytlikova, M. 2004: Firm-level Consequences of Large Minimum-wage Increases in the<br />
Czech and Slovak Republics. Labour, Vol. 18, No. 1.<br />
Hatrák, M. 2007: Ekonometria. Bratislava: Iura Edition.
90<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 83-90)<br />
Neumark, D. – Wascher, W. 1992: Employment effects of Minimum and subminimum wages: Panel<br />
Data on State Minimum Wage Laws. Industrial and Labour Relations Review, Vol. 46, No. 1.<br />
OECD 1998: Statutory Minimum Wages, Employment and Poverty. OECD Employment<br />
Outlook.<br />
Puchá, N. 2005: Komparatívne a konkurenčné výhody v novej ekonomike. In: Zborník príspevkov zo<br />
4. Medzinárodnej doktorandskej konferencie: Ekonomické, politické a právne otázky medzinárodných<br />
vzťahov. Ekonomická univerzita Bratislava, Fakulta Medzinárodných vzťahov.<br />
Ragan, J. 1977: Minimum wages and the youth labour market. Review of Economics and Statistic 59.<br />
Samson, Š. 2008: Dejiny ekonomických teórií – Ekonomické myslenie v predhistórii, klasická<br />
a neoklasická ekonómia. Košice: Elfa.<br />
Vokorokosová, R. 2008: Minimálna mzda a konkurencieschopnosť. Košice: Elfa.<br />
Welch, F. 1976: The minimum wage legislation in the United States. Evaluating the labour market<br />
effects of social programs, Princeston University.<br />
Zavodny, M. 1998: Why Minimum Wage Hikes May Not Reduce Employment. Federal Reserve Bank<br />
of Atlanta. Economic Review, Q2.<br />
Law on Minimum Wage in Slovakia (current version of Minimum Wage Law)<br />
www.wikipedia.com<br />
www.statistics.sk<br />
Longman Dictionary of Contemporary English, 1978.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 8 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 7 March 2010
SCIENTIFIC REVIEW<br />
Information Resources for Financial Monitoring<br />
in Enterprises<br />
Kościelniak Helena * , Czestochowa University of Technology,<br />
The Management Faculty, Poland<br />
UDC: 65.012.12 JEL: D83<br />
ABSTARCT – For their operation, organizations employ a particular combination of human,<br />
financial, material and information resources. Except for land, capital and labour, information has<br />
become the fourth means of production since it is used for achievement of the goals. Not all<br />
information that appear in economy becomes a means of production; this happens only in the case of<br />
information which shows nature of economic resources. W. Olejniczak emphasizes that a set of<br />
information, in order to become an economic value for an enterprise, must form an ordered set.<br />
Financial monitoring is one of the most creative tools for management, allowing for creation of new<br />
information and decision-related resources.<br />
KEY WORDS: financial monitoring, production, management, enterprise, decision-making,<br />
information<br />
Information gap in the process of decision-making<br />
Under conditions of changing economy, information performs three functions (Penc<br />
2001):<br />
• it is a commodity; transactions might concern information-related products<br />
(particular type of information saved on a suitable carrier) or information services<br />
which consist in acquisition and making available a particular piece of<br />
information,<br />
• it is a resource, i.e. a group of particular pieces of information collected in suitable<br />
carriers, available to potential users, used in widely understood social and<br />
economic life,<br />
• it is a production factor.<br />
• It is emphasized that information sets might be analysed in three aspects<br />
(Olejniczak 1989):<br />
• syntax – by investigating the relationships between symbols representing<br />
economic information, without consideration of its content,<br />
• semantics – by investigating the content of economic information and the method<br />
of its representation by means of symbols,<br />
*<br />
Address: Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland
92<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />
• pragmatics – by investigating economic information from the point of view of its<br />
value for the recipient.<br />
Solving decision problems is connected with continuous accumulation of information.<br />
The difference between information which decision-makers would like to have and the<br />
information that can be actually acquired is termed ‘information gap’; it denotes sensation of<br />
lack of information, knowledge or understanding of a problem, which is necessary in<br />
decision-related situation.<br />
This indicates that it is of a highly subjective nature while its main properties include:<br />
• reference to a particular subject (lack of information sensed by a person is not<br />
necessarily sensed by another),<br />
• susceptibility to time factor (with the course of time and acquisition of<br />
information, the gap can be extended or reduced),<br />
• fuzzy information (limits opportunity to define its scope) (Flakiewicz 2002).<br />
Figure 1. The concept of information gap in the process of decision-making<br />
Progress in definition of the problem and acquisition<br />
of information<br />
Needed<br />
information<br />
Collected<br />
information<br />
Moment of final definition<br />
of the problem and<br />
making a decision<br />
Information gap<br />
Resoruces used for definition of the problem (money,<br />
Source: (Rabin, Jackowski 1988)<br />
For the purposes of management, it is essential that a particular quality of the prepared<br />
information, being the basis for decision-making, is ensured. This problem was emphasized<br />
by J. Penc. The author argues that proper decision is composed of 80% of information, 10% of<br />
inspiration (invention) and 10% of managers’ intuition (sensing) (Penc 2001).<br />
Functional properties of information obtained from users are presented in Table 1.
Kościelniak, H., Information Resources for Financial Monitoring, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98) 93<br />
Table 1. Quality features of output information<br />
Feature<br />
Reliability<br />
Selectivity<br />
Addressability<br />
Relevance<br />
Right on time<br />
Requested form<br />
Characteristics of output information<br />
factual (according to actual state) description of economic events and<br />
states<br />
Adapted to the characteristics of the problem or used method of<br />
management<br />
Adapted to individual need of a particular recipients, determined by<br />
the nature of the tasks they perform<br />
Relevant to particular demand for information (providing recipients<br />
with convenient tools for searching and extraction of data)<br />
Delivered on demand in right time (during decision situation) or<br />
periodical data within clearly defined deadlines<br />
Alphanumerical (text, tabular or graphical) with the level of detail<br />
(elementary data or aggregated, levels of summaries) and the carrier<br />
(screen, printouts, magnetic carriers) according to the recipients<br />
demands<br />
Source: (Niedzielska 1998)<br />
Maintaining quality features of information affects its value, suitability and usefulness<br />
within information base in a particular enterprise.<br />
Position of financial monitoring in information base in enterprises<br />
Monitoring is an informational mechanism which allows for tracking quantitative and<br />
qualitative changes of some predetermined objects of observations, using particular<br />
techniques of registration.<br />
Subject literature points to the following functions of monitoring:<br />
• collecting and processing of information and distribution of this information<br />
(Kowalczyk 2003),<br />
• formation of normative models, formation of empirical models and assessment of<br />
information and information processes (Oleński 2001),<br />
• definition of research areas in enterprises subject to monitoring, definition of<br />
standards and criteria for these areas, selection of rules for response to deviations<br />
and creation of organized forms of informational feed (Leszczyński 2002),<br />
• identification and selection of object of observation, description of objects by<br />
means of a pattern, registration of the results of object operation, comparison of<br />
patterns to the results, ordering and making available the results and patterns<br />
(Mytlewski 2007).<br />
On the basis of the abovementioned functions, it can be concluded that monitoring can be<br />
perceived as:<br />
• observation and suitably organized registration of all the parameters, events,<br />
situations connected with object operation, which might affect functioning of the<br />
whole object or its considerable part,
94<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />
• current control of execution of the plan along with confrontation of the degree of<br />
using budget with the plan for the performed tasks,<br />
• arduous research work allowing for assessment of decision accuracy and its<br />
correction as need arises,<br />
• informing decision-makers about possible threats and forcing them to respond.<br />
Application of the concept of monitoring for operation of companies allows for<br />
separation of a research area for financial monitoring from the wholeness of its business<br />
activity.<br />
Financial monitoring is a tool for management in the area of functioning of financial<br />
processes in enterprises. It is understood as a process of continuous economic and financial<br />
analysis supporting the process of making decisions by managers.<br />
Figure 2. Place of financial monitoring in management system<br />
Management Function<br />
Management Tools<br />
Planning<br />
Organization<br />
Leadership<br />
Controlling<br />
Key Areas<br />
Analysis<br />
Methodology<br />
Standards<br />
High Frequency<br />
Financial Monitoring<br />
Decision and Information Flow<br />
Source: (Skowronek_Mielczarek, Leszczyński 2007)<br />
Implementation of financial monitoring calls for meeting the following conditions:<br />
• definition of the need for continuous analysis,<br />
• proper description of financial events resulting from company’s operation using<br />
particular methodology.<br />
Investigating of information needs in a company requires methodical approach; example<br />
of such approaches are presented in Table 3.
Kościelniak, H., Information Resources for Financial Monitoring, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98) 95<br />
Table 3. Methodical approaches used to define information needs of users<br />
Method Description Application<br />
By-Product Investigation of needs is a sideeffect<br />
since its main goal is to<br />
investigate final product<br />
Used during development of subsystem<br />
problems; advantages include laboureffectiveness<br />
and short time necessary<br />
for investigations; disadvantages: in<br />
most of cases decision – maker needs<br />
are only partially met<br />
Total Study<br />
Critical Success<br />
Factor<br />
Key Indicator<br />
System<br />
Business<br />
Information<br />
Characteristics<br />
Study<br />
Business Process<br />
Model<br />
Investigating of bigger group of<br />
executives<br />
The areas which should be under<br />
constant supervision of<br />
management are defined<br />
Rests on selecting of key indicator<br />
of ‘health’ within an organization<br />
aimed at collecting of the data<br />
which can be processed into<br />
different sets of information<br />
On the basis of information model<br />
of organization, so called unique<br />
resources are defined, which<br />
facilitates analysis of current<br />
databases and problems<br />
encountered by management, a set<br />
of unique identifiers, characterizing<br />
management objects within an<br />
organization are created. The<br />
identifier and relating data<br />
comprise ‘resources’ with actual<br />
data, which allows for highlighting<br />
problems which impact on<br />
company performance.<br />
Aims at recognition of basic, initial<br />
units which initiate processing of<br />
input information realized in next<br />
phases, such as: preparation of<br />
general plan, verification of<br />
economic processes in companies<br />
and their units.<br />
The critical areas of activities are<br />
defined, however, it requires use of<br />
considerable resources<br />
Analysis of progress in realization of<br />
tasks allows on current assessment of<br />
management performance; high labourconsumption<br />
of work<br />
It allows for separation of common<br />
types of functions, whose performance<br />
requires relevant information. An<br />
attempt to identify environment and to<br />
define hierarchy of goals is also made;<br />
difficulties include objective definition<br />
of these goals/functions and<br />
decomposition.<br />
Elimination of ‘information scatter’<br />
between information system and needs,<br />
shortens the process of improving of<br />
insufficient information which can not<br />
be recognized through another analysis;<br />
it accelerates production of software<br />
fourfold on average.<br />
It is possible to create, in a written form,<br />
a model of the processes which occur in<br />
organization and the analysis of the<br />
needs and flows in organization<br />
connected with these processes and, in<br />
consequence, it allows for recognition<br />
of data transferred between economic<br />
processes in the organization.
96<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />
Method Description Application<br />
Enterprise Activity<br />
Matrix<br />
Information Control<br />
Net Model<br />
Rests on a theory of organization<br />
with limited number of tasks<br />
(activities) and these tasks being<br />
performed by means of subject of<br />
labour available in a company. In<br />
consequence, a matrix including all<br />
activities within an organization<br />
can be created. It mainly requires<br />
definition of activities in<br />
organization (what is being done),<br />
environmental conditions (how it is<br />
being done) and subjects of<br />
activities (what is used to perform<br />
the activities)<br />
Formal model of determination of<br />
users needs in office environment; it<br />
is formed by graphical techniques<br />
and standard notation, which forms<br />
a framework for collecting data,<br />
imposes coherence, completeness,<br />
logical organization and is<br />
conducive to comparison of<br />
alternative procedures, preparation<br />
of forms and data sets.<br />
Source: (Kisielnicki, Sroka 1999)<br />
It gives management a view of<br />
everything what happens or should<br />
happen through the method of task<br />
assignment and a demanded<br />
information system characteristics<br />
Used for representation and analysis of<br />
flows of information in progress,<br />
procedures for activities simplifies them<br />
and automates overlaying activities.<br />
Financial monitoring suits very well to the methodical approaches listed in the table. It<br />
combines features of all the described methods used for determination of users’<br />
informational needs.<br />
Financial monitoring is a system which integrates the methods of processing and flow of<br />
different streams of information with management system (Komorowski 2001) and supports<br />
management in supervising the most significant components in operation of entities<br />
(Kisielnicki, Sroka 1999).<br />
A. Skowronek-Mielczarek and Z. Leszczyński point to important and specific features of<br />
financial monitoring, including (Skowronek-Mielczarek, Leszczyński 2007):<br />
• selection of key areas of management of company’s finance,<br />
• definition of standards and reference bases, which become the basis for<br />
assessment and verification of activity,<br />
• application of tools for modern financial analysis,<br />
• continuous observation and registration of changes in the investigated financial<br />
processes.<br />
In consideration of the features of monitoring it is remarkable that it comprises the basis<br />
for creation of new informational and decision-related resources for enterprises. System of
Kościelniak, H., Information Resources for Financial Monitoring, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98) 97<br />
monitoring supports management of enterprises through early warning and assessment of<br />
threats during operation of businesses. It also reduces information gap (see Figure 3).<br />
Figure 3. Information System and Financial Monitoring<br />
Real area of enterprise<br />
Information system in enterprise<br />
Information gap<br />
Collected information<br />
Needed information<br />
Financial monitoring<br />
Gap reduction<br />
Source: own study on the basis of (Mytlewski 2007, Rabin, Jackowski 1988)<br />
Summary<br />
To sum up, it can be concluded that monitoring system, being a subsystem for<br />
information systems in enterprises, overtakes the tasks of information system and is in tune<br />
with it in terms of functions, language and tools. Moreover, monitoring system integrates<br />
management and formal requirements. In target model, it should lead to reaching a<br />
compromise between interests of all parties which communicated the demand for<br />
information in enterprises through giving them access to any profile of information.<br />
References<br />
Flakiewicz W., Systemy informacyjne w zarządzaniu (uwarunkowania, technologie, rodzaje), Wydawnictwo<br />
C.H. Beck, Warsaw 2002<br />
Kisielnicki J., Sroka H., Systemy informacyjne biznesu. Placet, Warsaw, 1999<br />
Komorowski: Planowanie finansowanie w przedsiębiorstwie. ODiDK, Gdańsk 2001<br />
Kowalczyk S., Informacja w monitorowaniu otoczenia organizacji, [in] red. R. Borowiecki, M. Kwieciński,<br />
Monitorowanie otoczenia. Przepływ i bezpieczeństwo informacji. W stronę inteligencji, KW, Zakamycze<br />
2003<br />
Leszczyński Z., Monitoring finansowy w zarządzaniu małym i średnim przedsiębiorstwem; [in] Zarządzanie<br />
małym i średnim przedsiębiorstwem. Uwarunkowania europejskie. Red. M. Strużycki, Difin, Warsaw<br />
2002<br />
Łukasik-Makowska B., Niedzielska E., Społeczeństwo informacyjne – już teraźniejszość czy dopiero<br />
perspektywa? [in:] Informacja w społeczeństwie XXI wieku, red. A. Łapińska, Uniwersytet Warmińsko-
98<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 91-98)<br />
Mazurski, Olsztyn 2003Mytlewski A., Monitoring ekonomiczny przedsiębiorstw, Wydawnictwo<br />
Uniwersytetu Gdańskiego, Gdańsk 2007<br />
Niedzielska E., Informatyka ekonomiczna, Wydawnictwo Akademii Ekonomicznej, Wrocław 1998.<br />
Olejniczak W., Projektowanie systemów informacji ekonomicznej w przedsiębiorstwie, PWE, Warsaw 1989<br />
Oleński J., Ekonomika informacji, PWE, Warsaw 2001<br />
Penc J., Decyzje menedżerskie – o sztuce zarządzania. Beck, Warsaw 2001<br />
Rabin J., Jackowski E. M., Handbook of Information Resource Management, Marcel Dekker, New York<br />
1988.<br />
Skowronek-Mielczarek A., Leszczyński Z., Controlling. Analiza i monitoring w zarządzaniu<br />
przedsiębiorstwem, Difin, Warsaw 2007.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 12 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 7 March 2010
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
Business Relations in Reverse Logistics Outsourcing<br />
Grabara Janusz * , Kot Sebastian, Czestochowa University of Technology,<br />
The Management Faculty, Poland<br />
UDC: 65.011.1 JEL: M1; M2<br />
ABSTRACT – Nowadays cost reduction is a fundamental strategy used in companies during<br />
fighting for survival, keeping or increase in sales levels and profits. More and more often observed<br />
tendency to concentrate commercial and production companies leads to rise of demand for outsourcing<br />
in a reverse logistics chain. In the paper Authors present concept of outsourcing in logistics processes,<br />
advantages of outsourcing in reverse logistics and types of relations between outsourcing partners as<br />
well as areas and stages of collaboration: engagement, improvement and communication.<br />
KEY WORDS: business relations, outsourcing, logistics processes, commercial companies,<br />
production companies<br />
Outsourcing idea in logistics services<br />
A strategy commonly termed ‘outsourcing’ is nothing more than a subcontracting, to a<br />
specialized companies, a part of functions and processes previously performed on your own.<br />
The scope of operations encompassed by outsourcing is becoming wider and wider. The<br />
subcontracting concerns e.g.: transport and forwarding (organizing of transport by the<br />
shipper), advertising, market survey, security services, social facilities (holiday and sport<br />
facilities), health care, legal services, training, financing of transactions, banking services and<br />
contract insurance. Outsourcing concerns exclusively services.<br />
Another words Henry Ford characterized very appositely phenomenon which is<br />
specified today with name of outsourcing. ʺIf there is something we cannot do more efficiently,<br />
more inexpensively and better than our competitors, so there is no sense we do it. We should employ<br />
somebody for executing this work who will do it betterʺ (Michałek 2005). He didnʹt foresee at the<br />
same time probably that the assertion just even often unwittingly is a base for todayʹs<br />
entrepreneursʹ wondering reflections above applying outsourcing to oneʹs companies.<br />
Outsourcing describes the deliberate movement of a series of connected business<br />
processes to a which manages them on behalf of the company. The classic processes were IT,<br />
warehousing and distribution, facilities management, and payroll – and to these can now be<br />
added call centers, manufacturing, web development, home shopping, credit cards, and even<br />
merchandising and design. In these movements the commercial risk and assets are usually<br />
passed to the outsourcing company (Waters 2007).<br />
No doubt that outsourcing has become big business. From early beginnings in the mid- to<br />
late 1970s, many companies have traveled the outsourcing road, and as technology and<br />
*<br />
Address: Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland, e-mail: grabara@zim.pcz.pl
100<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />
accessibility to shared electronic data have increased so has the range of services offered by<br />
outsourcing companies.<br />
The global logistics market has an estimated value of 972 billion US dollars (Transport<br />
Intelligence 2006). The Asia Pacific market was the largest with the share of 412 billion USD<br />
spent on logistics. Europe, Middle East and Africa regions spent about 290 billion USD,<br />
while Americas accounts for the balance of 270 billion USD.<br />
It is estimated that 265 billion USD (27%) was spent for outsourced logistics activities.<br />
Western European firms are more likely to outsource logistics and supply chain activity.<br />
Capgemini study (Capgemini and Langley 2004) showed that Western European businesses<br />
spent 61% of their logistics spend on their third-party provider services against 44% in North<br />
America and 49% in Asia Pacific.<br />
Globalization and increase in world trade has made the fast growth in the outsourcing<br />
market. As more products are sourced across borders, the complexity of the supply chain<br />
increases, driving many companies to outsource to third-party providers. This is particularly<br />
true as companies move manufacturing and operations to regions such as Asia, Eastern<br />
Europe or South America, where they seek to mitigate risk by outsourcing their logistics and<br />
supply chain operations.<br />
Outsourcing of logistics services may take a variety of sizes and shapes. In its most<br />
extreme form it leads to total liquidation of own logistics system and taking on responsibility<br />
for logistics management by external operator.<br />
In logistics outsourcing the lead is taken by international operators with necessary<br />
competence in terms of logistics strategic consulting and the execution potential connected<br />
with the branch experience. The operator must ensure their customers as best services as<br />
possible at the competitive price. In Polish market two following groups of logistics services<br />
can be characterized:<br />
• transport services, which should be treated as fundamental services resulting<br />
from the necessity to move things and persons from one place to another,<br />
between the source and the goal, with the limited scope of consulting, which<br />
might concern, in case of e.g. international deliveries, the most favourable supply<br />
base. Relocation- transport is an activity performed in order to satisfy particular<br />
needs, which requires to cover the distances either by a person or by goods in<br />
order to satisfy such needs. (Szczepaniak 2002)<br />
• forwarding services, which, in its fundamental form consist in organization of the<br />
transport processes, insurance, preparation of necessary documentation and<br />
customs services. More advanced shipping services, which bring great cost<br />
benefits in case of general cargo or pallet cargo (as opposed to full truck load),<br />
include services provided by the consolidated shippers on the basis of the<br />
network of several or more than ten terminals, which consists in consolidation or<br />
deconsolidation of a particular cargo, custom packaging, with warehousing<br />
option and in more modern version of cross docking and thus in transition of<br />
cargo through terminal (without warehousing) and stopping their movement<br />
only for the time necessary for order picking, changes in cargo shape and changes<br />
in means of transport.
Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 101<br />
• logistics services, which, apart from transport and forwarding activities,<br />
encompasses terminal services, starting from cross-docking, through warehousing<br />
to order picking (including picking and packaging) and additional activities:<br />
labelling, re-packing, foil packing, minor repairs, creation of promotional sets etc.<br />
(sometimes referred to as co-packing). Moreover, logistics companies often<br />
control their clients’ inventory, undertake complex servicing of distribution or<br />
logistic consulting – reaching far more than a selection of the route for deliveries<br />
or a supply base. The basis for creation of logistics services is to own a wide area<br />
computer network which might be connected with a client’s network in a variety<br />
of configurations.<br />
A company, which intends to subcontract logistics services to another external company<br />
should realize that they will partially or totally lose control over some processes connected<br />
with logistics. A considerable role is played by successful cooperation based on partnership<br />
of both companies and mutual trust (Rydzkowski 2004).<br />
In order for this goal to be achieved, companies often abandon performance of various<br />
traditional activities e.g. legal services, research, pay policy, accounting services through<br />
transfer of these service to specialized external companies. Such a policy enables company to<br />
focus their assets and efforts on what they can do best, e.g. on production, commercial<br />
activity or providing the services. Many companies which need to reduce its organizational<br />
structure finds logistics to be an activity, which can be disposed of in order to reduce costs<br />
and to improve the customer service.<br />
While highlighting the concept of outsourcing one should consider what makes the<br />
companies order logistics activities from specialized external services. The reasons<br />
for such activities are numerous, however, the most important include the need for<br />
having logistics activities performed in best way as possible, which is possible in case<br />
of these activities being performed by a specialized entities with appropriate<br />
infrastructure and capacity which enable logistics services to be provided on possibly<br />
highest level. Thus it seems that the argument for such a cooperation is lack of<br />
workload within the company which can focus on its core activities as well as<br />
easiness of flexible response to any changes within its environment. The advantages<br />
concern also economical aspect, through reduction in costs and service area both<br />
inside the company as well as services for customers. Obviously, such a solution has<br />
particular disadvantages due to the possibility to be dependent on external service<br />
provider as well as loss of own know-how in terms of technology and logistics<br />
knowledge. Therefore, a company which makes a decision on outsourcing should<br />
consider arguments both for and against it. Main factors for outsourcing include<br />
(Duck and Schotz 1998):<br />
• the costs related to logistics activity are clearer, mainly through easiness of their<br />
recording,<br />
• cost reduction is possible through selection of most competitive offer in the<br />
market, which enable more flexible use of the owned resources,<br />
• levelling of internal problems which make performance of tasks difficult.
102<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />
The arguments against implementation of outsourcing include:<br />
• probability of being dependent on service provider,<br />
• risk of deterioration in quality of own products (e.g. improperly transported),<br />
• necessity of exact calculations in terms of costs, especially in the aspect of cost<br />
reduction,<br />
• lack of possibility to use experience in logistics obtained during operation in the<br />
market.<br />
The companies who decide to subcontract logistics activities outside focus more on<br />
coordination of operation within the area of cooperation with service provider and they can<br />
organize their logistics system so that it functions more efficiently within the chain. The<br />
solutions for organization of logistics processes enable formation of such structures which<br />
will enable using of all advantages of the described solutions. It should be considered if the<br />
companies are able to form their logistics chains so that all logistic activities and processes<br />
connected with their coordination are performed in a way that enables formation of an<br />
efficient structure adapted to the needs so that the achievement of the predefined goal of<br />
logistically managed organization is possible, i.e. finding right customers and ensuring them<br />
availability of the offered goods. From the company’s point of view the processes should be<br />
efficient both organizationally and economically.<br />
The processes which occur in contemporary economy indicate evolution, leading to the<br />
situation in which traditional divisions which separated production, commerce and service<br />
companies are fading away. More and more often logistics systems of separated companies<br />
are being replaced by whole logistics systems of logistics chains. The definition of the essence<br />
of logistics activities is becoming more and more difficult, mainly due to the fact of faded<br />
borders between companies. Evolution of outsourcing leads to the situation where instead of<br />
normal subcontracting of services such as transport or warehousing a so called third party,<br />
and even the fourth-party logistics, is implemented for virtually total acquisition of the<br />
logistics area. The concerns may arise if employing external service provider, particularly a<br />
close cooperation with them, do not lead to losing control over the processes, which is very<br />
important as the companies which provide outsourcing services are on the supplier-customer<br />
interface. Thus, they should organize the processes, to the benefit of the client, so that the<br />
customers are satisfied and buy goods from our company. On the other hand, the fact that<br />
logistics services providers are actually only an intermediaries, who not necessarily identify<br />
themselves with the company’s goals, might cause that they are not intent on satisfying the<br />
customer. This situation is dangerous and might lead to losing positive image by the<br />
company, which, in consequence, negatively impacts on the sales. On the other hand, despite<br />
some threats of using outsourcing, proper operation of companies (especially those operating<br />
in global markets) without using logistics services is actually not possible. This happens<br />
because one company is not able to specialize so much as to become a leader in production,<br />
marketing and logistics and other areas of operation. The competition between supply chains<br />
has become so strong that it is necessary to look for new solutions which enable to gain<br />
competitive advantage (Schary, Skjott-Larsen 2002). One of them is outsourcing in reverse<br />
logistics.
Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 103<br />
Typical activities of reverse logistics include processes which the company uses to collect<br />
worn out, damaged, unwanted or outdated products and the processes of packaging or<br />
sending materials from final user to manufacturer.<br />
If the products are returned to the company, the company has a variety of possibilities to<br />
handle them. If there is possibility to return a product to supplier at the full cost<br />
reimbursement, the company might choose this option as first. If the product has not been<br />
used yet, it can be re-sold to another customer or might be re-sold in the manufacturer’s<br />
shop. If the product is not of full value to be sold, it is passed to the repair services company,<br />
which, after appropriate repairs and improvements will export this product to the market.<br />
If a product can not be sold in current condition or if the company can considerably<br />
increase its price through renovation, recovery or processing of the product, the company<br />
can perform such activities before the product is sold. If the company does not perform such<br />
activities in its location, the intermediary companies, cooperating on the basis of contract or<br />
through outsourcing, can be involved in this procedure or the product might be sold<br />
immediately to the company which renovates, recovers or processes products.<br />
After performing these activities, the product might be sold as a renovated product or a<br />
processed product but not as a new one. If the product can not be renovated due to its bad<br />
condition or the environmental law does not permit to do this, the company can try to use<br />
this product at the lowest possible cost of production. The reverse logistics might involve a<br />
wide variety of activities. These activities might be performed in the following way: goods,<br />
materials, product or package in reverse flow return from end user or other user in<br />
distribution channel such as retailer or distribution centre. Independently of its final<br />
designation, all products in the reverse flow must be stored and sorted before despatch to<br />
the final destination locations.<br />
If a product gets to reverse logistics flow from the customer, this might be a damaged<br />
product. The customer might also only think that the product is damaged while it is actually<br />
in good repair. This might result from customer’s lack of knowledge on using a particular<br />
product.<br />
If a product has not reached the final stage of its life, the customer may return the<br />
product to the service shop or directly to manufacturer. If the product has reached its final<br />
stage of usability, the customer may, in some cases, return product to manufacturer and a<br />
producer might use it in an appropriate way or to recover materials.<br />
If a product is returned by the partner in supply chain, this occurs because the product<br />
has not been sold or the partner wanted to get rid of it. The product might also reach its final<br />
stage of life or final stage of regular sales season. The product might also be damaged or<br />
destroyed.<br />
Reverse logistics is strategically used mainly to enable users of a traditional channel –<br />
such as retailers and wholesalers – to take opportunity of reduction of risk of buying<br />
products which might not sell perfectly. For example, a company might create a software<br />
which controls the number of returns for various products depending on different elements<br />
which characterize particular groups of products.<br />
Strategy which involves possibilities of reverse logistics considerably impacts on<br />
company’s cost. The goal of almost each business is to attach its customers to the company so<br />
as the customer do not change the supplier. There are many methods to build relationships
104<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />
which make it difficult to the customer and which put customers at risk of losing the benefits<br />
in case they change suppliers. An important services which supplier can offer to the<br />
customer is to give opportunity to return not sold or damaged products immediately, which<br />
credits customers on a temporary basis.<br />
Initiation of reverse logistics might be a strategic response to a situation of growth in<br />
competitive environment. Most of sellers and manufacturers have in recent years liberalized<br />
its policy of returns, due to the pressure from competitors. The companies still believe that<br />
the satisfied customer and ensuring possibilities of returns of unwanted products (which,<br />
according to the customers do not match their needs) are essential.<br />
Cooperation in reverse logistics might concern its all aspects and activities such as<br />
collective planning, forecasting, design or marketing. This is essential due to the following<br />
benefits resulting from cooperation:<br />
• possibility of integrated information;<br />
• possibility of tracking and monitoring of events in supply chain;<br />
• improvement in clarity in supply chain;<br />
• possibility of managing the processes through corrective actions.<br />
Advantages of reverse logistics outsourcing<br />
Reduction of costs connected with logistics is justified in case when it leads to increase in<br />
profits. Currently the most popular form of saving in logistics departments is outsourcing of<br />
supply chain (Skowron-Grabowska 2008). Such a decision might impact on flows and<br />
financial results.<br />
First remarkable advantage is cumulating of commitments in the moment of the whole<br />
process of delivery. The settlements between individual suppliers are transferred to a<br />
logistics companies. The ordering entity gets the elongated deadline for payments and better<br />
opportunities to negotiate the price. The financial sources released in such a way increase its<br />
current assets.<br />
In order to execute the logistics processes it is necessary to involve fixed assets with a<br />
considerable value. They are mainly used for maintenance of distribution systems. In such<br />
systems, the resources of enormous value are employed – warehouses, distribution centres,<br />
local storage areas. The physical flow of goods between points of sale is realized also by the<br />
fleets which usually belong to the companies themselves and not to the specialized service<br />
providers. More and more often a tendency appears to rationalize distribution systems, e.g.<br />
through using specialized services of suppliers of complex logistics solutions. This tendency<br />
arose from the popular belief that actual cost of financing of investments with fixed assets is<br />
sometimes much higher than the cost generated by the investment.<br />
Another element which makes companies to abandon the attempts to extend fixed assets<br />
connected with logistics is the efficiency of their use. The logistics companies show higher<br />
flexibility in terms of warehousing facilities and fleet. Another advantage of subcontracting<br />
the supply chain maintenance to a specialized logistics company is a fact of savings, which<br />
appears as a result of liquidation of the transport/warehousing departments. Such units,<br />
apart form labour costs, absorb a lot of expenditures connected with purchase of software<br />
(Kot and Slusarczyk 2009). A drawback of most of these systems is the price and lack of
Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 105<br />
possibilities to be used in other departments. Logistics companies also make use of advanced<br />
systems, however, the cost of their purchase might be spread among a few clients.<br />
Among numerous benefits connected with a supply chain outsourcing, having influence<br />
on financial standing of the company, the most important include:<br />
1. Increase in current assets through more profitable form of liabilities and<br />
opportunity to achieve time compression.<br />
2. Better use of fixed assets.<br />
3. Reduction in costs not connected with core activities in the company.<br />
Relationship in outsourcing activity<br />
The 3pl/customer relationship is one where “partnership” can provide the basis for the<br />
business relationship and outsourcing success. The confirmation of this can be words of J.<br />
Rodriguez: “If you understand the customer’s business model, the markets and geographies it wants<br />
to penetrate, the verticals it wants to target, its different manufacturing options and so on, you can<br />
continue to find low-hanging fruit. But if your relationship is just as a vendor of logistics services,<br />
you hit a brick wall.” (Murphy 2005)<br />
Continuing, partnership has to be on both fronts. The customer has to allow the service<br />
provider to become an intricate part of its business and look beyond the service it currently is<br />
providing. Good partnerships share joint development, benefits and common strategic<br />
vision.<br />
Collaboration with high degree of trust is next step of engagement in relation between<br />
outsourcing partners. J. Grubic (Grubic 2006) writes that the degree of trust in a relationship<br />
determines the level of flexibility a customer will allow the 3PL in operating the best of its<br />
capability. He also argues that this flexibility is necessary to deliver best-in-class process and<br />
solutions and in turn achieve the required performance and cost objectives. Good<br />
collaboration will support business change and challenges, allowing both parties to review<br />
continually the current state against the vision and to agree actions to be taken to stay on<br />
course.<br />
Sometimes outsourcing partners went to a business trap when thinking that all problems<br />
with logistics and supply chain processes have gone away to the 3PL. In fact some problems<br />
may now be a responsibility of the 3PL, others still remain firmly the responsibility of<br />
customers, and moreover there are some new issues to do how to manage the relationship.<br />
Outsourcing will not work unless the customer stays deeply involved (Bowman 2006). It is<br />
really important that customers stay involved but they should focus on managing the 3PLs<br />
on strategic level, not to be involved in every decision taken by the 3PL. However, a good<br />
customer will want to collaborate around those activities that directly impact on service and<br />
where is a touch-point with their business.<br />
We can point on following stages of collaboration between outsourcing partners:<br />
Engagement where IT system integration, account management and implants are most<br />
important. Part of the engagement between 3PL and its customer is the way of data<br />
interchange. It is extremely important to tightly integrate the 3PL system with the client’s<br />
ERP system. High level of integration allows for fast flow of high volume data. The process
106<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107)<br />
is extremely reliable, with leading integration platforms having audit techniques that can<br />
signal an alert if message leave one system but are not received or processed in the other.<br />
The 3Pl providers have also seen the opportunity for embedding implants into their<br />
customers operation for some time now. There is no better way to meet the customer<br />
requirement and understand its aims than to provide an implant working side by side in a<br />
planning or other supply chain role. Account management is also important, because of it<br />
can help in the retention of customers, lead to more business with clients, potentially leading<br />
to improved profits for the 3PL and customers as well. By helping the customer to improve<br />
its operations, costs or sales, the 3PL is adding value.<br />
In continuous improvement stage, we can point on the sector expertise, process<br />
improvement and innovation as a main elements. One of the factors that 3Pl offers their<br />
customers is expertise in the industry sector concerned. This provides the opportunity to<br />
help clients understand industry best practices and to provide benchmarking data.<br />
Moreover, many times 3PLs provide customers ideas they had learned in other industries.<br />
The continuous improvement contains also process improvement. Resulting in cost and<br />
service benefits. Also, it is clear that innovation brought from 3PLs can be an element of<br />
outsourcing collaboration influencing on whole supply chain market position. Innovations<br />
such as RFID, picking by voice are the sort of solutions that customers are looking for to<br />
enhance their operations.<br />
At last, communication should be pointed as a key ingredient for ensuing a good<br />
relationship between provider and customer. Communication is the responsibility of both<br />
parties in the relationship, and to ensure good level of communication they both need to<br />
provide channels for this to happen. Regular meetings provide a forum to discuss business<br />
changes and its impact on needs and priorities, it is also the best time to understand<br />
customer vision.<br />
Summary<br />
To achieve a success in outsourcing relationships in every logistics functions including<br />
reverse logistics, the customer expectation should be properly aligned with the 3PL business<br />
model and relationships structure. The customer expectations focuses mainly on: superior<br />
service and execution, trust, openness and information sharing, solution innovation, ongoing<br />
executive level support. The Capgemni study (Langley and Capgemini 2005) showed that,<br />
although relations between outsourcing partners are satisfactory, there is still much to be<br />
done and that both parties desire a more collaborative and strategic relationship. One of the<br />
reason this has not happened is that customers see the issue as the 3PLs’ responsibility, and<br />
vice versa. In truth of course it takes two parties to really work hard to make any form of<br />
relationship work.<br />
References<br />
Bowman R. J.: In managing outsourced relationships, there are no simple solution. Global Logistics and<br />
Supply Chain Strategies, July 2006<br />
Capgemini and Langley C.: Logistics Outsourcing is an Important Driver of Topline Growth and Corporate<br />
Strategy, According to New Global Study. FedEx, Philadelphia 2004
Grabara, J., et al., Business Relations in Reverse Logistics, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 99-107) 107<br />
Duck O., Schotz S., Gospodarka materiałowa. Poradnik praktyczny, Wyd. Alfa-Weka, Warsaw 1998<br />
Grubic J.: Leveraging logistics outsourcing relationships. http://logistics.about.com/library/uc040303a.htm<br />
Kot S., Slusarczyk B., , Process Simulation In Supply Chain Using Logware Software, Annales<br />
Universitatis Apulensis Series Oeconomica, 2009, Vol. 2, Issue 11<br />
Langley J., and Capgemini: 2005 Third-Party Logistics, Results and Findings of the 10 Annual Study,<br />
Capgemini 2005<br />
Michałek M.: Nie tylko koszty, czyli co trzeba wziąć pod uwagę przy podejmowaniu decyzji o<br />
outsourcingu, [in:] Gospodarka Materiałowa i Logistyka no. 11/2005<br />
Murphy J.V.: Finding value In mature outsourcing relationships, Global Logistics and Supply Chain<br />
Strategies, June 2005<br />
Rydzkowski W., Usługi logistyczne, Instytut Logistyki i Magazynowania, Poznań 2004.<br />
Schary, T.Skjott-Larsen P.B., Zarządzanie globalnym łańcuchem podaż, Wyd. PWN Warsaw 2002<br />
Skowron-Grabowska B.: Position of Logistics Centers in Reverse Supply Chains. [in:] Enterprise,<br />
Logistics and Innovations in Knowledge Based Economy. Ed.by Maria Nowicka-Skowron & Ralph<br />
Lescroart, Haute Ecole “Blaise Pascal”, Arlon 2008<br />
Szczepaniak T., Transport i spedycja w handlu zagranicznym, PWE, Warsaw 2002.<br />
Transport Intelligence 2006. Global Supply Chain Intelligence Portal. www.transportintelligence.com<br />
Waters D.(ed.): Global logistics. New Directions in Supply Chain Management. Kogan Page, London and<br />
Philadelphia 2007<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 6 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 25 February 2010
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
Social Aspects in Buyer-Supplier Relationships of SMEs<br />
in Hungary<br />
Gubik Andrea, University of Miskolc, Institute of Economic Theory, Hungary<br />
UDC: 658.11(439) JEL: P43; P31; N84<br />
ABSTARCT – Cooperation among companies was brought to the focus of attention by the fast<br />
changes of economic circumstances and the role it can play in coping with risk, appreciating all those<br />
characteristics which can help fast reactions and adaptability, like faith among business partners and<br />
long run relationships. The entrepreneur him/herself has a great influence on the characteristics of<br />
cooperation as well, besides these processes pushing them to the direction of cooperation, whose<br />
intention to get involved depends on his/her skills, abilities, but such characteristics of the company<br />
like scale, fields of activities affect it too. Economic, social and cultural circumstances are of major<br />
importance too, among which the above mentioned factors pursues their effects. Cooperation among<br />
companies can happen on any fields of the firms’ activities, for example research and development,<br />
marketing, purchase, or trading. This present paper intends to introduce the reader to the<br />
characteristics of supplier-purchaser relationships of small- and medium sized enterprises, based on an<br />
empirical research’s experiences. According to our opinion, we can draw conclusions on the intention<br />
to cooperate concerning the nature of the buyer-supplier relationships of companies, so a wide range of<br />
information can be concluded on small- and medium sized enterprises’ partnerships.<br />
KEY WORDS: supplier-purchaser relationships, SMEs, Hungary<br />
Introduction<br />
Small- and medium sized enterprises receive more and more attention these days all over<br />
the world considering their economic, and their social importance. Economic processes and<br />
their fluctuations caused an increase in the uncertainty of economic decisions and<br />
appreciated flexibility on all fields of companies’ management. The ever stronger<br />
competition and permanent change in circumstances forces the actors of the economy to<br />
renew themselves from time to time, to search for new methods and new solutions to their<br />
problems. Networking and the evolution of a broad scale of international relations among<br />
companies can be regarded as one of these innovative solutions.<br />
Partnerships have always been playing an important role in the lives of the majority of<br />
the small- and medium sized enterprises, mainly because of the limited nature of their<br />
resources. But uncertainty accompanying changes and the requirement of enhanced<br />
flexibility brought about major changes both in the quality of company cooperation and in<br />
the circle of the participants.<br />
The evolution and development of Hungarian small- and medium sized enterprises<br />
shows major differences from the international trends. This specialty is explained by several<br />
factors by the authors (for example by historical traditions, and by socialisation inheritance
Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 109<br />
of loose business faith, by the lack of in heritage effect, by the valuable nature of political<br />
relationships and their economic effects, etc.) (See for example: Róbert 1999, Román 2007,<br />
Kuczi 1998, Czakó et al. 1995, Gábor 1997.). Hungary’s small-and medium sized enterprises<br />
show resemblance to neither the development process based on economic logic characteristic<br />
for the Western part of Europe, nor with the SME sector of Asian countries which is based on<br />
social traditions. Its evolution and development can be regarded as an organic process as its<br />
major fragment had evolved based on obligations after the changing of the Regime. On the<br />
other hand social traditions had not played major role in its development. All these factors<br />
determine the operation, attitudes and practice of the actors of the Hungarian SME sector.<br />
All these specialities are of major importance even if Hungarian SME sector does not<br />
show major differences concerning statistical data from other European countries. This is the<br />
reason why we will have to be careful in using the results of international researches (for<br />
example Observatory of European SMEs, 2003). This is even more important in case of the<br />
data of the North-Hungarian Region.<br />
Our research intends to fill in this gap, searching the answer for the question what type of<br />
work distribution specialties can be observed in the chosen circle of the small-and medium<br />
sized enterprises on the one hand, while on the other hand what kind of characteristic<br />
differences can be found compared to international surveys. Based on these researches we<br />
intend to answer the important question of whether the analysed circle of Hungarian<br />
entrepreneur had already managed to form real cooperation or not.<br />
Methodology<br />
In my empirical work I used the questionnaire accomplished in the framework of the<br />
FKFP 0015/2002. education and research project. The data basis constructed based on the<br />
results of the survey contains representative data according to employee number and field of<br />
activity of 217 small- and medium sized enterprises of Borsod-Abaúj-Zemplén county (10-<br />
249 employees). Furthermore, 16 micro enterprises’ (1-9 employees) answers were also used,<br />
but only case of the questions concerning the subjective opinions of entrepreneurs about<br />
tendencies. In case of these questions I always guided the attention to treat these results with<br />
precaution. The county’s structure of SMEs concerning the scale of enterprises shows major<br />
differences from neither national nor European statistics. If analysing only enterprises<br />
employing more than 10 people the distribution of small-and medium sized enterprises is 80-<br />
20 percent.<br />
For the analyses of the data I used SPSS 14.0 software package. I analysed the sample by<br />
descriptive statistics, multi-variable analyses, cluster-, factor analyses and by correlation<br />
showing the strength of stochastic relationship among variables.<br />
In order to able to draw general conclusions based my sample I paid special attention to<br />
the structure of my sample. I used the layered sample technique belonging to the group of<br />
random samples. The reliability of the sample was 95 percent, the sampling error ± 6,16<br />
percent. During the analysis I used pair wise method when treating missing values, I only<br />
used the full answers in case any questions. In my research I considered 0,05 significance<br />
level to be relevant and gave the probability values by the distinct questions if they differed.
110<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />
The situation of Borsod-Abaúj Zemplén County<br />
In this paper we would like to demonstrate the county’s situation only by laying some<br />
data, given the limited framework of this paper. The per capita GDP is 1355 thousands HUF,<br />
which is 67 per cent of the national average (KSH, 2006a). The same fallback is perceptible in<br />
investments, where the county’s per capita performance is 70.3 per cent of the national<br />
average (KSH, 2006a). The county shows underdevelopment in terms of the economic<br />
organisation’s statistics as well. Low enterprising willingness implies unfavourable economic<br />
situation as well. 4.8 per cent of the country’s registered organisation can be found in the<br />
county, about 63 thousands, which are enterprises in almost 90 per cent of the cases. This<br />
statistic proves that enterprising here is far below the national average. The number of<br />
enterprises vested for a thousand inhabitant is 77 while the national average is 120 (KSH,<br />
2006a). It partly contradicts the GEM’s subsequent survey, as according to it the Northern-<br />
Hungarian region is the 4-5th in the region’s hierarchy in terms of enterprising activity.<br />
According to the authors the better data can be the sign of convergence, in which motorwaybuilding<br />
can act as a catalyser. (Szerb, Varga, 2004). In terms of research-expansion,<br />
performance is below the national average again. (KSH, 2005a, 2005b).<br />
Unfavourable economic situation reflects in the social indices as well. The unemployment<br />
rate was 11.7 per cent in the first quarter of 2006, whilst the national average is 7.7 per cent.<br />
We can find further unfavourable social tendencies while analysing emigration and<br />
polarization.<br />
Results of the empirical research<br />
In the course of the research the cooperation declared by companies (when the company<br />
filling in the questionnaire declared involvement in cooperation) and latent cooperation were<br />
treated separately. In this paper we focus on this latter. (The question was the following: Are<br />
you involved in any types of cooperation beyond buyer-supplier relationships (cooperation:<br />
long run partnership among independent small- and medium sized enterprises which aims<br />
to achieve some kind of common goal going beyond a distinct action, a one-time<br />
transaction.)<br />
Latent cooperation was analyzed by the characteristics of buyer-supplier relationships, their<br />
share, geographical distance and the time-horizon of the relationship. Companies had to give<br />
the characteristics of their three most important buyer and supplier.<br />
Literature emphasizes the advantages of long run cooperation, because of the routines<br />
and the evolution of mutual faith, by which companies can realize economic benefits. A<br />
possible benefit of this kind can be the ever decreasing cost of processes.<br />
According to our work hypothesis rational companies will form permanent partnerships as<br />
strategic decisions within a relatively narrow geographical area.<br />
In order to be able to test this hypothesis we asked the companies about their three most<br />
important partners.<br />
The average share of the most important purchaser is higher than 50 percent, but we face<br />
a high level of standard deviation (St dev=27,9). The most important supplier’s share is<br />
slightly beyond this, it is 48,3 percent (St dev=25,2). A weak but significant relationship can<br />
be found between the shares of purchasers and suppliers (p=0,01, Pearson Correlation=0,302)
Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 111<br />
which mean that the concentrated nature of purchaser and supplier relationships are<br />
interrelated, companies with a concentrated circle of purchasers tend to have more<br />
concentrated supplier relationships.<br />
After analysing the share of the most important partners, the length of the surveyed<br />
companies’ buyer-subcontractor relationships was analyzed.<br />
Table 1. The average length of buyer relationships according to type of the buyer and size of the<br />
company<br />
Size Type of the buyer Average (year) N Standard Deviation<br />
Consumer 10,10 31 5,31<br />
Small and medium sized<br />
10,33 12 6,41<br />
enterprise<br />
10-19<br />
Large enterprise 7,95 19 4,74<br />
Local government 7,50 2 3,54<br />
Total 9,42 64 5,33<br />
Consumer 13,58 12 4,38<br />
Small and medium sized<br />
8,13 23 3,92<br />
enterprise<br />
20-49<br />
Large enterprise 9,14 21 5,15<br />
Local government 12,67 3 2,52<br />
Total 9,83 59 4,85<br />
Consumer 23,25 8 19,73<br />
Small and medium sized<br />
9,71 7 4,64<br />
enterprise<br />
50-249<br />
Large enterprise 10,64 14 5,56<br />
Local government 9,00 2 1,41<br />
Total 13,58 31 11,94<br />
When analysing the length of partnerships it can be concluded that the average length of<br />
relationship with the most important buyer is over 10 years (St.dev=7,059). Partnerships<br />
among companies and their suppliers also last for almost 10 years on average (St.dev=6,04).<br />
The analysis of buyer-supplier relationships of companies is made more difficult by the<br />
fact that companies’ chances to survive differ according to their size, so the average age of<br />
the groups of companies also differ. So the average age of partnerships increases with the<br />
increase of the scale of companies.<br />
That’s’ why we introduced a new variable by filtering the age of companies to decide the<br />
permanent nature of these relationships by measuring the length of the relationships as a<br />
share (%) of the companies’ age.<br />
The variable expresses the faith of buyers to the company and the company’s loyalty to<br />
its suppliers.<br />
Length of the partnership as<br />
a share of the companies’ age<br />
=<br />
Time period of the partnership (year)<br />
Age of the company (year)
112<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />
The average value of the permanency index is 0.783 in case of the most important buyers,<br />
while 0.72 in case of suppliers which shows that companies’ relationships can be regarded to<br />
be stable.<br />
It can be concluded based on these tests that there is a connection between the permanent<br />
natures of the surveyed companies’ relationships: if a company decides to be involved in a<br />
permanent relationship, it is more likely to act so in all of its partnerships (p=0,000, the most<br />
important and second important buyer’s Pearson Correlations 0,721; the most important and<br />
second important supplier’s Pearson Correlations 0,657). This means companies tend to<br />
harvest the additional gains of cooperation as strategic decisions.<br />
After this the buyer-supplier relationships were analysed according to their geographical<br />
concentration. According to our working hypothesis there is a connection between the size of<br />
companies and the geographical concentration of their relationships and the geographical<br />
concentration and the permanent nature of cooperation.<br />
Local markets are generally very important for the surveyed companies. The smaller the<br />
size of a company is, the more likely it is to be connected to the local environment, to the<br />
local market, because of its limited resources and the characteristics of its purchasers. It was<br />
cleared that personal contacts and human factors generally are decisive in respect of the<br />
cooperation’s success. That is why they play a major role in forming permanent cooperation.<br />
When analyzing the partnerships from the geographic point of view it can be concluded<br />
that there is a statistically significant relationship between the geographical distance and the<br />
size of the company involved in cooperation (p=0,01, Eta 0,341). That means, that the smaller<br />
the company is, the more like its partnerships are concentrated. These are demonstrated by<br />
the following figures.<br />
Figure 1. Geographical concentration of suppliers according to the size of the company<br />
100%<br />
80%<br />
60%<br />
40%<br />
20%<br />
0%<br />
10-19 20-49 50-249<br />
Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign
Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 113<br />
Figure 2.Geographical concentration of buyers according to the size of the company<br />
100%<br />
80%<br />
60%<br />
40%<br />
20%<br />
0%<br />
10-19 20-49 50-249<br />
Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />
The further extent of cooperation proved to be matched with the more permanent nature<br />
of relationships.<br />
On the other hand, both the characteristics of activities and their types are decisive in the<br />
aspect of geographical situation of the partners (p=0,000, Cramer’s V=0,259). Buyers of<br />
companies in the fields of merchandise and services are more concentrated geographically;<br />
more distant partnerships and international activity are rather characteristic for industrial<br />
companies. The main connections are shown on figure 3.<br />
About 90 percent of the partners of companies supplying directly consumers or local<br />
governments can be found in the same region the firm is situated in. Buyers of those who sell<br />
to small- and medium sized or large enterprises are less concentrated, but even in their case,<br />
partners pursuing their activities in the same region play a major role (63,7 and 49,3 percent).<br />
Figure 3. Geographical concentrations of buyers according to the affiliation and field of<br />
activities of the buyers<br />
100%<br />
90%<br />
80%<br />
70%<br />
60%<br />
50%<br />
40%<br />
30%<br />
20%<br />
10%<br />
0%<br />
Consumer<br />
SME<br />
Large enterprise<br />
Local government<br />
Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />
100%<br />
90%<br />
80%<br />
70%<br />
60%<br />
50%<br />
40%<br />
30%<br />
20%<br />
10%<br />
0%<br />
Industry<br />
Trade<br />
Services<br />
Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />
Suppliers’ geographical positions differ both according to the type of supplier and the<br />
field of activity. Suppliers of small enterprises can usually be found in the same region where
114<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />
the company is situated in. With the increase of the supplier company’s size the probability<br />
of having more distant partners increases too (p= 0,000, Cramer’s V= 0,304). This context is<br />
shown on figure 4.<br />
Inter-regional relationships of both industrial and service sector firms are over-average<br />
important (56,5 and 59 percent). In case of services major differences can be found according<br />
to branches of services pursued (transportation and financial activities are less concentrated).<br />
Figure 4. Geographical concentrations of suppliers according to the affiliation and field of<br />
activities of the companies<br />
100%<br />
100%<br />
80%<br />
80%<br />
60%<br />
60%<br />
40%<br />
40%<br />
20%<br />
20%<br />
0%<br />
Small enterptise<br />
Medium sized enterprise<br />
Large enterprise<br />
Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />
0%<br />
Industry<br />
Trade<br />
Services<br />
Same region Other Hungarian region Foreign<br />
The time-horizon of the surveyed companies’ buyer-supplier relationships and the<br />
geographical concentration was analysed separately. The stochastic relationship between the<br />
permanent nature of relationships (the length of the partnership as a share of the companies’<br />
age) and the geographical location of the buyer-subcontractor was tested.<br />
Based on the edification of the sample the more close partners are situated to each-other<br />
(the buyer and its supplier), the more lengthy their relationship will be. We can conclude<br />
that personal relationships favour the length of partnerships and human factors of<br />
cooperation can be decisive for its success.<br />
Table 2. The average length of buyer relationships according to the geographical location of buyers<br />
Geographical location of buyers Average (year) N Standard Deviation<br />
Same seat as the company 12,41 32 4,655<br />
In 50 km round of the company 9,93 41 8,878<br />
Same region 9,46 37 4,959<br />
Other Hungarian region 9,24 33 3,873<br />
EU member state 9,29 14 5,797<br />
Other country 3,00 3 1,732<br />
Total 9,99 160 6,144<br />
High values of deviation warn us that the sample is not homogenous, so the context was<br />
analysed distributing buyers to types as well. According to the type of purchaser small- and<br />
medium sized enterprises show a significant, while large enterprises show no significant<br />
relationship between the geographical position and the length of the partnership, which
Gubik, A., Social Aspects in Buyers-Supplier Relationships, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116) 115<br />
means that in case of large companies, purchaser partners’ geographical distance does not<br />
play an important role in the permanent nature of the relationship.<br />
The permanency of the partnership (percentage form) and the geographical position of<br />
the purchaser also show the same context, geographical closeness of the purchaser increases<br />
with the permanency of the partnership (p=0,02, Éta2=0,117).<br />
The above mentioned observations concerning the cooperation among companies shed light<br />
on the contradiction of the time-horizon and geographical aspects of partnerships.<br />
The geographical concentration of partnerships is beneficial for the companies involved<br />
as it contributes to the permanent nature of relationships on the one hand, giving additional<br />
economic advantages for the companies, but on the other hand, concentration denies the<br />
requirement of economic rationality as it causes the company to be dependent on the<br />
economic fluctuations of its close environment.<br />
Summary<br />
Interrelation can be found between the permanent nature of the surveyed companies<br />
most important partnerships: if a company forms permanent relationship on any fields of its<br />
activity, it will try do act so in all of its partnerships. Companies tend to harvest the<br />
additional advantages of cooperation by making strategic decisions. Permanent partnerships<br />
are usually made within a relatively narrow geographic region and as the concentration of<br />
partnerships increases so will increase the time-horizon of the relationships as well.<br />
Permanent and geographically concentrated partnerships of small- and medium sized<br />
enterprises contribute to harvesting the additional advantages of cooperation while on the<br />
other hand make them more dependent on their economic environment. Economic<br />
rationality appears in a paradox way in this case.<br />
This is why rationally behaving companies have to find the balance between forming<br />
economically beneficial permanent partnerships and bearing additional risk of geographical<br />
concentration.<br />
The survey of the county was a one time, cross section research, but we see the<br />
opportunity to broaden it to the North-Hungarian Region, with some adaptation of the<br />
questionnaire. This would enable us to make a regional comparison and moreover, to<br />
compare our results with the Observatory of European SMEs results on small- and medium<br />
sized enterprises.<br />
In the framework of the Laky Teréz Foundation’s grant an experts’ questionnaire will be<br />
accomplished in the course of which we would like to get to know the opinions of other<br />
parties (supporting institutions, authorities) too. The results of empirical researches will be<br />
controlled by this expert questionnaire and interviews will be made for the situation of<br />
small- and medium sized enterprises too, asking the representatives of institutions which<br />
influence small- and medium sized enterprises directly, or indirectly.<br />
Further qualitative research should be made, as the barriers of our research showed,<br />
which evolved from the complex nature of relationships among companies. This complexity<br />
of the system of relationships and the analysis of embeddedness requires qualitative<br />
methods to be used. Data standing at our disposal did not enable us to fully map all the
116<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 108-116)<br />
relationships between factors of partnerships, mainly in case of reasoning, so further efforts<br />
should be made to answer all questions.<br />
References<br />
Róbert, P. (1999): Kikből lettek vállalkozók? A vállalkozóvá válás meghatározó tényezői<br />
Magyarországon a kommunizmus előtt, alatt és után. Közgazdasági Szemle XLVI. évf. 403-427.<br />
oldal<br />
Román, Z. (2007): A vállalkozás a magyar gazdaságban – nemzetközi tükörben. Köz-Gazdaság 2007.<br />
II. évf. 2. pp. 67-84.<br />
Kuczi, T. (1998): Vállalkozói kultúra – az életutak finalitása. Replika 29. szám 1998.<br />
Czakó, Á., Kuczi, T., Lengyel, GY. Vajda, Á. (1995): A kisvállalkozások néhány jellemzője a 90-es évek<br />
elején. Közgazdasági Szemle, XLII. évf. 1995. 4. sz.<br />
Gábor, R. I. (1997): Belső versus foglalkozási munkaerőpiac – a posztszocialista átalakulás elhanyagolt<br />
dimenziója. Közgazdasági Szemle XLIV. évf. 457-473. oldal<br />
KSH (2006a): A gazdasági fejlődés regionális különbségei Magyarországon 2005-ben. Országos<br />
statisztika, Központi Statisztikai Hivatal Debreceni Igazgatósága<br />
KSH (2005a): Kutatás és fejlesztés 2004 Központi Statisztikai Hivatal<br />
KSH (2005b): Innováció 2003. Központi Statisztikai Hivatal<br />
Szerb, L., Varga, A. (2004): A vállalkozói aktivitás regionális és lakóhely szerinti különbségei<br />
Magyarországon 2004-ben. Megjelent: Vállalkozásindítás, vállalkozói hajlandóság és a vállalkozási<br />
környezeti tényezők alakulása Magyarországon a 2000-es évek első felében. Global<br />
Entrepreneurship Monitor, 2004 Pécs<br />
Observatory of European SMEs (2003/5): SMEs and Cooperation. KPMG Special Services and EIM<br />
Business & Policy Research in the Netherlands, European Network for SME Research, Intomart<br />
Luxembourg.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 8 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 1 March 2010
ORIGINAL SCIENTIFIC PAPER<br />
Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia<br />
Střelecká Zdenka * , Ekonomická univerzita v Bratislave, Národohospodárska fakulta,<br />
Bratislava, Slovakia<br />
UDC: 336.7 (437.6) JEL: G21; N24<br />
ABSTARCT – The process of fundamental changes of Slovak banking sector has had essential<br />
influence on the concentration and on the character of banking products. The article is oriented on<br />
analysing the competition level using Herfindahl index and CR3 and CR5 indexes. Indeces are used to<br />
compare the level of competition using following balance items: total assets, bank loans and deposits to<br />
corporate and retail sector. This approach brings us different conclusions.<br />
KEY WORDS: competition, banking sector in Slovakia, Herfindahl index, CR3, CR5, balance<br />
sheet<br />
Introduction<br />
Competition is a basic component of a well-functioning market mechanism. It is a rivalry<br />
between individuals or economic groups with their differentiated interests and goals. In<br />
general, we recognize competition on the supply or demand side, price or non-price and<br />
perfect or imperfect competition. Imperfect competition is further characterized as<br />
monopolistic competition, oligopoly and monopoly. Information about the level of<br />
concentration is important not just for the evaluation of market structure, but they help in<br />
the process of creating recommendation for concrete measures of monetary policy.<br />
Because of its special position it is important to determine the level of the competition in<br />
the banking market. Firstly, it is because banking market belongs to the markets with high<br />
and strict regulation. Supervision on the banking sector is carried out by specialized<br />
departments of the Ministries of Finance, separate offices or central banks. In Slovakia, the<br />
supervision is operated by National Bank of Slovakia (NBS). Secondly, entry in the market is<br />
a subject to several restrictions. For example the management has to be qualified enough; it<br />
has to obtain a banking license from the supervisor and has to own a sufficient level of<br />
capital. Furthermore, during their activity commercial banks have to meet the requirements<br />
of domestic supervisor and the minimum capital requirements known as Basel II. On the<br />
other hand it is known that banks undertake high risk and their actions affect the overall<br />
development of the economy. That is the main reason why the banking sector is a subject to a<br />
higher degree of regulation than other sectors are. In the past the importance of healthy<br />
functioning of the banking sector forced the governments in many countries to undergo<br />
restructuring process of banking sectors to avoid the negative impact on the entire sector and<br />
on the whole economy.<br />
*<br />
E-mail: zdenka.strelecka@gmail.com
118<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />
The bank is exposed to risks on both sides of its balance sheet. On the asset side it runs the<br />
market and credit risk (counterparty default risk). On the liabilities side there is a risk of<br />
availability of the bank´s funds and their time restriction.<br />
Measures of competition<br />
Frequently and easily used way how to determine the concentration in a particular sector<br />
are concentration ratios, the Herfindahl index and Hirshman index. With these indices it is<br />
possible to determine the level of market concentration; the higher the concentration is the<br />
weaker market competition will be.<br />
Recent studies dealing with the competition in the banking market use a Boone indicator,<br />
which is based on the opposite approach - the more efficient bank is the greater market share<br />
of competitive market it gains. In some cases, especially when comparing banking markets<br />
with various sizes, the Boone indicator appears as a more appropriate and flexible variable.<br />
Concentration ratio is designed as a sum of variable rk which represents market share of<br />
the i th largest firm.<br />
Herfindahl index (some sources refer to Herfindahl-Hirschman Index, HHI index) is<br />
based on the theory of industrial organization of Harvard School. This theory deals with the<br />
relationship between the industry structure – conducting the business - and its performance<br />
(so-called SCP paradigm “Structure - Conduct – Performance”). Highly concentrated<br />
structure is associated with monopolistic behaviour (Tokárová Mária, Rievajová Eva (2007)).<br />
It is defined as the sum of the squares of market shares of all firms. Index takes into account<br />
the number of firms in the industry and their market share. Analytical transcript of<br />
Herfindahl index (Kočišová Kristína (2008, p. 20)) is as follows:<br />
h - real function of n variables<br />
n - number of firms in the industry<br />
qk - the value of the variable for the i th firm, k = 1, ..., n<br />
Q – the value of the variable for the industry<br />
rk – the market share of the company in the industry converted in the percentage<br />
By definition of the U.S. Department of Justice, the market is considered as highly<br />
concentrated if the HHI exceeds 1800 1 . If the value is below 1000 the market is considered as<br />
not concentrated. When the value of the index is close to zero it is a symbol of a competitive<br />
environment without a dominant player. If all firms in the market have equal market share,<br />
then inverse value of the index represents the number of firms performing on the market.<br />
1<br />
[cit. 2009/12/31] http://www.justice.gov/atr/public/testimony/hhi.htm
Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 119<br />
Modified version of HHI index is a Hirschman Index, the analytical entry is defined as<br />
follows:<br />
The index can take values [0.1]. Low value of Hirschman index shows highly competitive<br />
environment, by contrast, value close or equal to 1 indicates maximal concentration<br />
(Kočišová (2008, p. 21)).<br />
These indicators have one disadvantage. They do not distinguish between large and<br />
small countries. The fact that the concentration may occur as a result of a natural competition<br />
when the effective company eliminates its market rivals is also ignored.<br />
Competition in the Slovak banking market<br />
As a measure of the competition in the Slovak banking market National Bank of Slovakia<br />
uses three indices: CR3, CR5 indeces and the HHI index. For comparison, Czech national<br />
bank uses different measure and that is a Lerner index.<br />
• CR3 index is defined as the share of the three banks with the highest volume of<br />
the variable on total volume of the variable in the banking sector; only institutions<br />
with the positive value of the variable are included in calculation<br />
• Analogically CR5 presents the share of five banks with the highest volume of the<br />
variable on the total volume of the variable in the banking sector; only institutions<br />
with the positive value of the variable are included in calculation<br />
• Herfindahl Index (HHI) is defined as the sum of the squares of individual banksʹ<br />
share on the total volume of the variable, expressed in percentage; only<br />
institutions with the positive value of the variable are included in calculation.<br />
The following chart shows the evolution of all three indices since the year 2005 till the<br />
second quarter of 2009 using the total assets as a variable. Looking at the development of the<br />
HHI index it is best to see that level of competition does not stagnate and during the period<br />
2005 - 2Q 2009 several changes in various indicators occurred. Increase in the value of the<br />
HHI index means an increase in market concentration (and vice versa the reduction of<br />
competition). In the year 2005 HHI index reached the value 1084 and in the second quarter of<br />
2009 the value of the 1220. Although the values are within the zone of moderate market<br />
concentration, it should be noted that since the year 2005 there has been a substantial<br />
increase of the concentration ratios in the banking market.<br />
During the years 2006, 2008 and during the second half of 2009 CR3 indicator and the<br />
HHI index reached the highest values. The share of five largest banks (CR5) on total assets<br />
more or less copied the development. The exception is the year 2006 when there was a<br />
decline in the share of the five largest banks and increase in the share of three largest banks.<br />
We could say that during this year three largest banks reinforced their leading market<br />
position. Looking on the decrease of CR3 and HHI parameters between 2005 and 2007 thus<br />
caused an increase in competition. In the same time variable CR5 had an opposite<br />
development. The share of five largest banks on total assets increased at the expense of the
120<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />
share of three largest banks, which can be defined as a positive development. The highest<br />
degree of concentration was observed at the end of 2008, which was due to the big amount of<br />
cash deposits from population. The reason for cash deposits was a euro adoption and<br />
conversion of Slovak crowns to euro currency. Later on commercial banks imposed these<br />
funds through the deposit facility in the NBS. In comparison with the study of European<br />
central bank the average value of CR5 indicator for 25 European countries is 72% (European<br />
central bank (2005)).<br />
Chart 1. Development of the HHI index, CR3 and CR5 indeces on the total assets market 2<br />
Analyzing the values of indices for different sectors (retail and corporate) and for each<br />
balance sheet item (client´s credits and client´s deposits) it allows us to observe in which<br />
sector the concentration reaches the highest level. The values of individual variables are<br />
shown in the following two tables. The first table is an analysis of market concentration for<br />
credits to corporate and retail sector. The second table monitors developments on the deposit<br />
market. (CR3 R – CR3 indicator for retail sector, CR3 C – CR3 indicator for corporate sector,<br />
CR 5 R – CR5 indicator for retail sector, CR5 C – CR5 indicator for corporate sector, HHI R –<br />
HHI index for retail sector, HHI C – HHI index for corporate sector)<br />
Table 1. CR3, CR5 a HHI index values on the loan market 1<br />
credits CR3 R CR3 C CR5 R CR5 C HHI R HHI C<br />
2005 64% 40% 81% 58% 1610 907<br />
2006 63% 43% 81% 63% 1588 981<br />
2007 61% 48% 82% 68% 1587 1088<br />
2008 63% 47% 82% 67% 1607 1096<br />
2009Q1 64% 47% 82% 67% 1618 1096<br />
2009Q2 64% 47% 83% 67% 1639 1088<br />
2<br />
[cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk
Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 121<br />
Table 2. CR3, CR5 a HHI index values on the deposit market 3<br />
deposits CR3 R CR3 C CR5 R CR5 C HHI R HHI C<br />
2005 61% 52% 75% 68% 1612 1314<br />
2006 62% 53% 76% 69% 1636 1344<br />
2007 63% 55% 75% 74% 1625 1480<br />
2008 64% 58% 76% 75% 1614 1485<br />
2009Q1 63% 56% 75% 74% 1580 1459<br />
2009Q2 63% 56% 75% 74% 1567 1503<br />
Using individual balance sheet items instead of total assets demonstrate us higher values<br />
of concentration indices. Values for deposit market differ at most. In comparison with the<br />
value of the HHI index for total assets they vary approximately from 300 to 500 points.<br />
Competition in the credit market developed in different way. Compared with the<br />
analysis of total assets, the values of the HHI index in the retail sector are higher by 400 to<br />
500 points and in the corporate sector are even below around 200 points. The concentration<br />
on the credit market for the retail sector is substantially higher than the concentration for the<br />
corporate sector. Similar development can also be seen on the deposit market even though<br />
there is not so high disparity.<br />
Chart 2. HHI index for loans and deposits to retail and corporate sector 2<br />
The values of the HHI index for retail sector on both markets reached the value around<br />
1600 (see Chart 2). This level of concentration indicates that a low level of competition<br />
dominated in this sector. It should be noted that the market with the HHI index value of 1800<br />
is considered as a highly concentrated.<br />
In the corporate sector, the situation on the market with deposits and loans is different. A<br />
high level of competition dominates on the credit market. The values of the HHI index in<br />
deposit market for corporate sector are catching up with the index values in deposit market<br />
for retail sector. This is a sign of lower competition than on the credit market.<br />
3<br />
[cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk
122<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />
Chart 3. CR3 and CR5 indeces on credit market 4<br />
The development of the CR3 and CR5 indeces for credit market gives us interesting<br />
conclusions. While the share of five largest banks for the retail sector changed over the<br />
period very slightly, in 2007 the proportion of three and five largest banks in the credit<br />
market for the corporate sector reached the highest level. An important and surprising fact is<br />
that the difference between the share of three largest banks in the retail sector and the share<br />
of five largest banks in the corporate sector is minimal. What once again is a demonstration<br />
of the low level of competition in the services for retail sector and the dominant position of<br />
the three largest banks.<br />
Until 2007 deposit market for retail sector had substantially higher concentration than the<br />
corporate sector. But since 2007 the share of five largest banks in both sectors is almost equal<br />
(the difference is 1 percentage point.). Although the share of three largest banks in the<br />
corporate sector is lower than in the retail sector, around 10%, there is a similar trend with<br />
the share of three largest banks in the retail sector. It should be noted that during the<br />
watched period in the retail sector minimal changes took place.<br />
Chart 4. CR3 and CR5 indeces for deposit market 3<br />
4<br />
[cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk
Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 123<br />
An alternative method of determining the competition<br />
An alternative way how to determine the competitive environment is to compare the<br />
difference between the individual market shares of market players. Total assets are<br />
considered as an appropriate indicator for determining the market share. In the following<br />
section the share of assets of the i th bank on assets of total banking sector (MS i) is compared<br />
with the share of assets of j th bank on total assets of banking sector (MS j).<br />
Chart 5. Development of market shares (variable – total assets) 5<br />
The difference between the market share of bank with the strongest position (leding<br />
bank, MS 1) and bank with the second largest share (MS 2) reaches the highest value in 2006.<br />
Comparing the difference between the market shares of leading bank and bank with the<br />
third largest share (MS 3) a similar trend can be seen. The development of these indicators<br />
gives us interesting results. While during years 2004 - 2006 leading bank affirmed its position<br />
(see Chart 5), between years 2007 and 2008 lost this favourable position and what is<br />
interesting the difference between the leading bank and position of the second and the third<br />
bank decreased. In the future we can expect the exchange of the positions between bank with<br />
the second and third largest market share.<br />
If in the calculation of market shares is variable “total assets” replaced by balance sheet<br />
items: client´s credits or clientsʹ deposits, it would bring us interesting conclusions, too. The<br />
development on the deposit market is slightly different. Till 2006 there is a widening gap<br />
between the market shares of leading bank and the bank with the second highest market<br />
share. During the years 2006 and 2008 there is a reduction of this difference. On the contrary,<br />
the difference between leading bank and the bank with the third largest market share (MS 1 -<br />
MS 3) during years 2004 and 2008 decreased (Chart 7). Leadership on the market with<br />
deposits and with total assets belongs to the same bank.<br />
5<br />
Author´s calculations. [cit. 2009/12/1] http://www.nbs.sk/sk/statisticke-udaje/menova-abankovastatistika<br />
/menova-statistika-penaznych-financnych-institucii#AM1-12PF
124<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125)<br />
Chart 6. Market shares (credits) 4 Chart 7. Market shares (deposits) 4<br />
The situation on credit market during the years 2004 and 2008 changed significantly. The<br />
bank with leading role in 2004 dropped to second place in 2005 and since 2006 it declined to<br />
third rung. The bank which won the leadership in 2005 remained at first place until 2007.<br />
In the following year the difference between MS 1 and MS 2 was minimal and the leading<br />
position was overtaken by the bank with the second largest market share of loans. These<br />
findings correspond with the development of the recent years. Due to the high economic<br />
growth we could observe easening of credit conditions and competitive fights between<br />
commercial banks.<br />
Analyzing the level of competition by using the market shares of 3 major banks brought<br />
us, especially for the credit market, opposed conclusions as the analysis of market<br />
concentration using the HHI index. While the HHI index (and also partly CR3 and CR5<br />
index) informed us about the stagnation or increase of market concentration, market share<br />
analysis demonstrated a highly competitive fight between commercial banks.<br />
Conclusion<br />
A general rule about countries with a small market is that they have a high degree of<br />
concentration. In Slovakia, more than 50% of banking sector assets is held by the three largest<br />
banks and approximately 70% is held by the five largest market players. Such a situation<br />
refers to a higher concentration, but compared with other ʺnewʺ EU countries we belong<br />
among the moderate above-average.<br />
Analysis of the market share of three largest banks has shown us competition and a<br />
decreasing position of the leading bank. On one hand, the situation in retail sector, where<br />
there is a permanently higher level of concentration than in the corporate sector, is caused by<br />
unconcerned consumers. On the other hand, the fact is that the three largest players on the<br />
banking market are banks with the longest history. Two of them operate on the Slovak<br />
market for more than 50 years and they inherited a number of clients from the previous<br />
socialist era, when bank did not need to fight for a client.
Střelecká, Z., Competition in Banking Market in Slovakia, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 117-125) 125<br />
Recently, the situation has changed dramatically. Except for the entry of few new players<br />
(most recently in November 2007), the Slovak banking sector was marked by the adoption of<br />
the euro and economic crisis. These two factors caused the decrease of profitability of the<br />
banking sector and both sides of the balance sheet were affected. One of the potential<br />
benefits of euro adoption should be an increase of competition but so far the development<br />
did not show such benefit. It will be questionable whether the future development will bring<br />
strengthening or weakening of the position of three biggest players.<br />
References<br />
European central bank. 2005. EU banking structures. Frankfurt am Main: European central bank.<br />
Kočišová, Kristína. 2008. “Konkurencia na slovenskom bankovom trhu”. Biatec, 16/2008 (10): 20-25<br />
Tokárová, Mária, and Rievajová, Eva. 2007. “Inovácie vo vývoji prístupov k teóriám konkurencie,<br />
súťaživosti, resp. protimonopolnej politiky.” http://semafor.euke.sk/zbornik2007/pdf/tokarova<br />
_rievajova2.pdf<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 13 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 14 March 2010
SCIENTIFIC REVIEW<br />
Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm<br />
Pachura Piotr * , Czestochowa University of Technology, The Management Faculty,<br />
Czestochowa, Poland<br />
UDC: 330.354 JEL: 031<br />
ABSTARCT – The aim of this paper is to present the role of cluster and network collaboration in<br />
innovativeness process and knowledge based economy. The paper describes the clustering pagadigm in<br />
EU policy and examples of the network creating process and organizing cluster initiatives in EU<br />
countries.<br />
According to the results of literary research it is possible to univocally state that the<br />
geographical proximity between enterprises of a similar profile of activity facilitates the<br />
achievement of a higher level of productivity and innovativeness. The clusters covering the<br />
spatial sphere of its location: producers, suppliers, service providers, research units,<br />
educational institutions and other units supporting a given sector became an important<br />
factor in the economic development of regions. The trend towards interaction and basing on<br />
the resources of business partners operating in a given location results from the new trends<br />
of management, among others, the school of resources in strategic management at the top<br />
with key competences and the open innovation paradigm.<br />
Directing the regional policies of the EU along the concept of clusters also results from<br />
the wide impact of the progressing globalization on the essence of inter-regional<br />
competitiveness as well as regional cohesion (Matlovič R., Matlovičová K. 2008). Increasingly<br />
lower costs of transport and communication and the simultaneous liberalization of<br />
international trade revealed the weaknesses of regional economies and exposed them to<br />
global competition. With regard to the increasing number of locations with attractive<br />
conditions for investment, European regions faced the necessity of offering foreign investors<br />
even more unique benefits. Clusters became in this situation a magnet attracting a bunch of<br />
highly specialized resources of knowledge in a given sector which are not present in other<br />
locations.<br />
Therefore, due to its practical application, the concept of the theoretical clusters<br />
regardless of whether the work of M. Porter or as a stage in the evolution of industrial<br />
districts of Marshall in the direction of the systems of innovation became one of the most<br />
important elements of economic, innovative and regional policies of the EU. The reasons for<br />
such a turnaround in the activities of the European Commission have been previously<br />
indicated. It is possible to add that the traditional instruments of supporting economic<br />
growth and the competitiveness of regions, for instance by supporting whole branches of the<br />
industrial sector, have not succeeded and had to be replaced by a mechanism that is more<br />
adjusted to the challenges of the global economy.<br />
*<br />
Address: Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland, e-mail: ppachura@zim.pcz.pl
Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 127<br />
The network approach to innovation and the according theory of clusters became the<br />
central point of interest for the EU. A key element in the policies of innovation of the EU<br />
became the cluster-based policy. This type of policy is defined as a grouping of activities and<br />
instruments used by the authorities at various levels for the improvement of the level of<br />
competitiveness of the economy by stimulating the development of the existing cluster<br />
systems or their creation at first and foremost the regional level (Brodnicki, Szultka, 2004).<br />
Among the elements that decide on the effectiveness of policies of supporting clusters the<br />
following assumptions can be listed (EDA, 1997):<br />
• The driving strength of the cluster policy is the free market;<br />
• This combines various units of the regional economy;<br />
• This is based on cooperation and mutual activity;<br />
• This takes the form of a strategic nature and helps to shape a common vision;<br />
• This creates new value.<br />
Involvement in initiating policies based on clusters can be naturally explained by the<br />
determination of EU member countries in the realization of the aims of the Lisbon Strategy<br />
whose achievement at the first deadline turned out to be impossible. Clusters seem to be the<br />
appropriate direction for the realization of the innovative policies of the EU. From the point<br />
of view of the European Commission, promoting policies based on clusters is to lead to the<br />
achievement of the aims of the Lisbon Strategy. The competing conglomeration of<br />
enterprises provides the possibility of access to the network filled with skills and abilities to<br />
generate innovation. They are becoming an effective environment in which it is easier to<br />
realize the initiation of new products immediately after their development in research<br />
laboratories.<br />
A policy based on clusters is not a separate element of activities on the part of national<br />
and regional authorities, but should be rather treated as an integral element of various<br />
policies. This is most frequently reflected in the assumptions of scientific policy or scientific<br />
and technological, innovative, economic, and regional development. In this way the idea of<br />
clusters penetrates into the strategy of development for regions, but is also taken into<br />
account in state programmes that are financed by the EU structural funds. Most often<br />
however, the philosophy of policies based on clusters takes on a horizontal nature and finds<br />
itself in all the afore-mentioned policies. It fits in perfectly into the policies of regional<br />
development based on the model of the innovation system. Clusters as a way of arousing the<br />
innovativeness of regions usually find themselves among the priorities of regional strategies<br />
of innovation. The cluster policy is part of the model of strengthening interactions within the<br />
framework of the so-called triple helix, or in other words, the system of interactions between<br />
the key players of the system of innovation: enteprises, scientific and research units and local<br />
authorities.<br />
The concept of clusters became a topic of interest for national and regional governments,<br />
organizations of entrepreneurs, international organizations particularly OECD countries and<br />
the EU in the second half of the 1990s. This interest can be observed through successive<br />
cluster initiatives, starting from the theoretical work explaining the essence of clusters to the<br />
attempts of working out the methodology of their identification and finally the guiding rules<br />
in the sphere of the policies of stimulating clusters in regions. These last initiatives are worth
128<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133)<br />
devoting more time to in order to illustrate the factors of success in undertaking activities<br />
within the framework of regional policies on behalf of the development of clusters, which<br />
has been done in the later stages of this paper. The guiding rules of the programme and the<br />
strategic documents of the EU took account of the concept of clusters relatively late as it<br />
occurred at the beginning of this century but it is necessary to explain this as a rather<br />
different approach to the issue of the innovativeness of regions. The efforts in this area were<br />
from the very beginning directed towards the issue of the systems of innovation, industrial<br />
districts and local innovative environments, which in their own essence are also based on the<br />
network paradigm of innovativeness.<br />
Apart from the initiation of the afore-mentioned models of regional development,<br />
another trend of activity in the EU associated with clusters was the creation of networks of<br />
interaction between regions. The stimulation of networks of interaction appears in various<br />
aspects and policies of the EU. The scientific and research policies can be used here as an<br />
example together with its main instrument in the form of the Framework Programmes that<br />
support the networks of interaction of scientific centres and their relations with industry. In<br />
the middle of the 1990s, the EU started to place particular emphasis on the issue of regional<br />
innovativeness. The breakthrough moment was the passing of the Lisbon Declaration by the<br />
European Council in 2000 and the acceptance of the aim of transforming the EU economy in<br />
the most competitive market based on knowledge in the world. In this context the policy of<br />
supporting clusters in EU member countries grew in importance and the regional authorities<br />
acknowledged that the foundation of competitiveness is that of small enterprises. The<br />
creation of an environment that is friendly towards the development of small firms became a<br />
priority, particularly through the stimulation of interaction between them and also creating<br />
interaction with the R&D sector. The strategy of development for EU member countries<br />
initiated with the aid of programmes financed by EU funds that were assigned priorities in<br />
the sphere of supporting networks of interaction at the level of enterprises and the area of<br />
R&D. The network model of innovativeness was accepted as binding, in which the theory of<br />
clusters fits perfectly.<br />
The activity of the EU Commission in the area of creating a favourable regulatory<br />
framework and the popularization of knowledge on the topic of clusters is confirmed by<br />
many conceptual papers and documents among which the following can be mentioned:<br />
• “Industrial Policy in an Enlarged Europe” from 2002, in which the creation of<br />
innovative clusters became acknowledged as the key priority of the new<br />
industrial policy,<br />
• Communiqué entitled “Some Key Issues in Europe’s Competitiveness – Towards<br />
an Integrated Approach”, according to which one of the proposed activities was<br />
to be the European project of identifying the best practices in the sphere of of<br />
initiatives of developing clusters,<br />
• Programme document entitled “Industrial Policy in an Enlarged Europe” from<br />
2004, in which the innovative policies and supporting initiatives based on clusters<br />
were listed as being of key importance (Ślusarczyk B., 2008),<br />
• Consultation document entitled “Innovate for a competitive Europe”, which<br />
states that the structural funds can support the internationalization of regional
Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 129<br />
clusters, which according to the European Commission became the effective<br />
mechanism of stimulating innovation.<br />
The policy of regional development based on clusters can be the effect of bottom-up<br />
initiatives, as well as resulting from top-down initiatives. The second type of operation is the<br />
effect of the activity of the local authorities, however the bottom-up activity is usually<br />
characterized by the activity of the branch environment. Regardless of the way of realization<br />
of the cluster initiatives, a significant role should be attributed to the public authorities.<br />
According to M. Porter, the role of the public factor in creating and stimulating the<br />
development of the cluster in the area of shaping the factors of production, related and<br />
supporting sectors, conditions of demand, as well as the strategy and rivalry between<br />
enterprises (Porter M. 2001).<br />
The first paper that carried out a complex analysis on the effects of policies based on<br />
clusters realized in selected countries is the document entitled “The Cluster Initiative<br />
Greenbook”. In this document the results of research into cluster initiatives were presented<br />
within the dimension of their effectiveness and range. Interesting results were also presented<br />
within the framework of a range of OECD projects (OECD 2001) directed at the analysis of<br />
practical aspects of the functioning of clusters. The afore-mentioned projects were aimed at<br />
diagnosing the existing state in the area of cluster initiatives, as well as working out the<br />
guiding principles in the area of formulating and initiating innovative policies based on<br />
networks. A compendium of knowledge and a type of guidebook on the topic of shaping<br />
policies based on clusters is constituted by the work prepared by the non-governmental<br />
organization IKED (International Organization for Knowledge Economy and Enterprise<br />
Development) (Anderson 2004). In the identification of the recommendations and factors of<br />
success in the realization of cluster initiatives the report prepared at the request of the<br />
Ministry of Trade and Industry of Great Britain was also used (A Practical Guide...) .<br />
On the basis of the afore-mentioned documents it is possible to indicate the experience of<br />
particular countries in the area of initiating policies based on clusters. The results of research<br />
facilitate the creation of the basic recommendations for the practical formulation and<br />
initiation of the policies of regional development based on the concept of clusters.<br />
Cluster initiatives most frequently appear in highly developed countries, mainly in the<br />
sectors of large technological intensities with regard to the following: IT,<br />
telecommunications, medical equipment, production technology, pharmaceuticals,<br />
automotive. Most initiatives were directed at the development of a specific cluster and were<br />
started between the years 1999 – 2002. The aims of creating cluster initiatives are very varied<br />
and can be classified within the framework of the following 6 categories: research and the<br />
creation of network interactions, education and training, innovation and technology,<br />
expansion of cluster, political activity, commercial interaction. Within the framework of the<br />
distinguished categories of aims, most participants of clusters (over 75%) indicate the main<br />
aims of their participation in cluster initiatives as follows: the creation of interaction between<br />
enterprises and creating relations between people, development of their own company,<br />
easier access to new technologies and the ability to create innovation. Initiatives that have a<br />
priority goal in promoting innovation and new technology achieve significantly greater<br />
success in the area of improving the competitiveness of particular enterprises.
130<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133)<br />
The process of creating and organizing cluster initiatives takes on different forms despite<br />
the fact that the nature of such initiatives enforces the principles of creating a partnership<br />
between the industrial sector, research and public authorities. The participation of particular<br />
parties is varied in individual cases. The idea of constructing a cluster is most frequently<br />
becoming an initiative of local authorities and the sector of enterprises at a more or less equal<br />
pace. A decidedly greater role in the aspect of financing cluster projects is played by public<br />
authorities. In over half of the clusters analysed, the main source of financing was the<br />
regional budget or national public units. In turn, the involvement of colleges in initiating<br />
clusters in their initial phase of development was very small, which clearly confirms the low<br />
financing coming from these units. A dominating role in managing clusters is played by the<br />
sector of enterprises, while the role of public authorities in some decisions is also envisaged.<br />
The involvement of local authorities, most often in the form of neutral organizational units,<br />
is to lead to the balancing of interests of the competing enterprises. The source of financing<br />
does not seem to have great significance in achieving results both in the aspect of<br />
competitiveness as well as the numbers of members of a cluster.<br />
According to the theory of clustering, most initiatives are directed in their own sphere in<br />
a given industrial branch or geographical zone. Most existing clusters include units that are<br />
located within a radius of one hour’s drive. The aspect of geographical distances was<br />
indicated as a significant factor in facilitating mutual personal contact. Clusters are not<br />
limited to the type of enterprises which can become its member. Both direct competitors and<br />
foreign business units can freely participate in the aforesaid initiatives. The only restriction<br />
in this regard refers to one level in the value chain, which means for instance a greater role in<br />
including specific producers but not their suppliers and clients.<br />
The fundamentality of initiating policies based on clusters is becoming univocally<br />
confirmed by the benefits indicated which are provided to enterprises in these types of<br />
initiatives. Entrepreneurs identify the success resulting from the membership of a cluster<br />
through the prism of competitiveness and achievement of business goals. Most<br />
entrepreneurs confirm that the initiatives led to the improvement of their competitiveness<br />
and the most frequent effect is the tightening of interaction between the industrial sector and<br />
the R&D area. The factors that are decisive in the success of clusters include the following:<br />
the quality of the business environment, structure and way of running economic policies, as<br />
well as the internal strength of the cluster itself. Within the framework of the first category<br />
two key factors should be listed which attract other firms to participate in the cluster<br />
initiative to the highest degree: the presence of an advanced scientific society and a high<br />
level of trust between firms, while also the public and private sectors. Economic policy is also<br />
significant with such elements as: promotion of scientific research and innovation, the<br />
possibility of taking economic decisions at a regional level, protection of the high level of<br />
market competition. The trend of achieving better results in the area of competitiveness is<br />
visible through cluster initiatives directed at strong clusters. Clusters with a significant<br />
economic meaning on the scale of the whole region or country and a longer history of<br />
existence are more attractive for new members. They usually attract the presence of<br />
enterprises that compete on an international scale.<br />
Within the framework of research presented in the Green Book a range of factors was<br />
diagnosed that are decisive to the failure of cluster initiatives. The greatest significance is
Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 131<br />
attributed to the lack of consensus in the area of taking action, as well as a clearly formulated<br />
vision for the initiatives and undefined aims of a quantifiable nature. Significant meaning in<br />
the failure of initiatives is played by the issue of insufficient resources, both in infrastructure<br />
and financing. Other elements that lead to unsatisfactory results are as follows: restriction of<br />
the range of membership to only groups of large enterprises, one level in the value chain or<br />
enterprises belonging to the location dictated. Large significance in the failure of cluster<br />
initiatives is also played by a lack of trust in the initiatives undertaken by public authorities.<br />
A survey of the reports prepared up to now on the topic of cluster initiatives in various<br />
countries enables us to note that the policy of supporting clusters takes on various forms. In<br />
reality it does not only vary from the level of analysis accepted and the methodology applied<br />
in supporting the process of networking, but also the degree in which the policy based on<br />
clusters was initiated, as well as the instruments used for this purpose.<br />
The most frequent elements in the strategies of the development of clusters include:<br />
• Strong competiveness of the economy and the reforms of economic policy in the<br />
area of market regulations,<br />
• Supplying strategic information by way of foresight type projects, cluster analysis<br />
and internet portals,<br />
• Agencies dealing in contacts with entrepreneurs and units supporting<br />
innovativeness e.g. innovation centres;<br />
• Development programmes for the development of clusters financed by public<br />
funds;<br />
• Establishment of centres of excellence connecting the industrial sector with the<br />
R&D area;<br />
• Adhering to public procurement (public tenders);<br />
• Construction of platform for public and private dialogue.<br />
In many countries the process of clustering was initiated by the establishment of<br />
allowances, platform and regular meetings involving enterprises and organizations from the<br />
business environment associated with a given branch. The motive for starting dialogue was<br />
the results of research projects, particularly the technological foresight, which aroused<br />
discussion and prompted joint action. Generally speaking, the process of initiating clusters<br />
and other networks of interaction in a dimension of European regions takes on various forms<br />
depending on the political culture, way of institutionalizing the dialogue between the public<br />
sphere and the private sector, the size of the regional economy, but also depends on the scale<br />
of intervention of public authorities in economic life, as well as the degree of industrial and<br />
technological specialization of the region.<br />
In the afore-mentioned reports and expert analysis a set of key recommendations in the<br />
area of initiating policies based on clusters indicates the factors of success listed below<br />
(IBNGR, 2002):<br />
• The main role should be accepted by the sector of enterprises, however public<br />
authorities take on the role of a catalyst in the development of the cluster in<br />
question. In such an arrangement, the expansion of the public and private sector<br />
partnership is key,<br />
• The aims of the initiated policies should be transparent and measurable,
132<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133)<br />
• Clusters should be built on the basis of existing potential and avoid creating<br />
initiatives in branches which are not sufficiently developed or generally do not<br />
appear in a given location,<br />
• The presence of a large enterprise in a given branch which is seen positively as a<br />
source of new technologies, acquisition of expertise, client base and suppliers, as<br />
well as space for the development of human resources,<br />
• Adequate technical infrastructure is essential together with a developed network<br />
of transportation and telecommunication connections, as well as an accessible<br />
base of attractive real estate for investors. Institutional mechanisms are helpful<br />
here in the form of entrepreneurial incubators, scientific, technological and<br />
industrial centres, due to the conditions of mutual work in a specified physical<br />
space offered by them;<br />
• The presence of an entrepreneurial spirit, especially among employees of a<br />
scientific and research unit and large innovative enterprises which is to lead to the<br />
formation of spin-off and spin-out firms;<br />
• The possibilities of access to financial capital in the form of high risk capital<br />
(venture capital), networks of investors searching for innovative and prospering<br />
enterprises (the so-called business angels), loan funds and finally public<br />
programmes, finance programmes e.g. EU funds;<br />
• The development strategy of a cluster should be realized at an appropriate level of<br />
local government which facilitates the effective initiation,<br />
• In the initial phase of development of a cluster an analysis of the potential or<br />
existing concentration of enterprises of a given branch should be analysed making<br />
use of the existing clusters in other locations. The results of this analysis should be<br />
used for public debate with the aim of working out a wide social consensus,<br />
• The action taken should enable the increase in the specialization of cooperating<br />
enterprises and institutions with the aim of realizing economies of scale and<br />
range, division of labour, as well as development on a local scale of specialized<br />
factors of production which facilitates the strengthening of the competitive<br />
position of the cluster,<br />
• Using the benefits accruing from the geographical proximity should be promoted<br />
by the establishment of associations of sub-suppliers or other forms of mutual<br />
interaction (e.g. associations of mutual credit guarantees) stimulating diffusion of<br />
knowledge and technology, as well as the processes of mutual learning,<br />
• In the case of highly technological clusters, one of the fundamental activities<br />
should be acknowledged as stimulating and creating flexible interactions at the<br />
level of industry and the academic sector,<br />
• For the achievement of success, it is essential to build clusters on the basis of<br />
formal and informal networks of interaction within which the information flows<br />
can take place. This type of social network that emerged on the basis of a high<br />
level of trust and social capital can be stimulated by strong institutional structures<br />
divided by cultural values and common goals;
Pachura, P., Innovation Policy Based on Network Paradigm, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 126-133) 133<br />
• The market success of a cluster is conditioned by the access to the base of skills<br />
understood as the highly skilled workforce;<br />
• Mechanisms should be created that enable resignation from cluster initiatives in<br />
the case of their failure.<br />
In summing up, the results of the analysis of the conditioning of the initiated innovative<br />
policy directed at clusters, it should be first and foremost underlined that the key aim of this<br />
policy should be to strive towards the creation of a long lasting competitive advantage in the<br />
economy of the region. The way for achieving the afore-mentioned aim can become a strong<br />
innovative cluster or group of smaller innovative clusters functioning within the framework<br />
of a coherent system of innovation. The policy based on clusters should be supported by a<br />
set of other complementary actions within the framework of related policies, which leads to<br />
the gaining of synergy effects. This is therefore the policy which penetrates into other<br />
policies and in its own essence takes on a nature of horizontal activities. The concept of<br />
clusters is according to other models of development for innovative regions and should be<br />
treated in this way as a supplement for the models of the learning regions, regional systems<br />
of innovation and the innovative environment. All the afore-mentioned theories of regional<br />
development are based on the network paradigm of innovation and enable local spatial<br />
arrangements to meet the challenges of the global knowledge economy.<br />
References<br />
A Practical Guide to Cluster Development, Department of Trade and Industry, DTI, London<br />
Andersson T., et al., The Cluster Policies Whitebook, IKED, 2004<br />
Boosting Innovation. The Cluster Approach, OECD, 1999<br />
Brodnicki T., Szultka S., Tamowicz P., Polityka wspierania klastrów. Najlepsze praktyki. Rekomendacje dla<br />
Polski, Niebieskie Księgi, Rekomendacje (Policy of supporting clusters.Best practices.<br />
Recommendations for Poland) No. 11, IBNGR, Gdańsk 2004<br />
Cluster Based Economic Development: A Key to Regional Competitiveness, EDA, 1997<br />
Innovative Clusters. Drivers of National Innovation Systems, OECD, 2001<br />
Matlovič, R., Matlovičová K., Regionálne disparity a regionálny rozvoj na Slovensku s osobitným zreteľom na<br />
Prešovský kraj. [In:] E. Rydz, A. Kowalak (eds.), Świadomość ekologiczna a rozwój regionalny w<br />
Europie Środkowo-wschodniej. Wydawnictwo Naukowe Akademii Pomorskiej, Słupsk, 2008<br />
Porter M., Porter o konkurencji, PWE, Warszawa 2001<br />
Ślusarczyk B., The EU Adjustments in the Sphere of Industrial Policy [in:] microCAD 2008. International<br />
<strong>Scientific</strong> Conference. Economic Challenges. Miskolc 2008<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 18 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 22 April 2010
SCIENTIFIC REVIEW<br />
Foreign Direct Investment and Global Economic Crisis<br />
Ślusarczyk Beata * , Czestochowa University of Technology, The Management Faculty,<br />
Czestochowa, Poland<br />
UDC: 339.727.22 JEL: 016<br />
ABSTARCT – In the article author defines globalization its features and effects. Furthermore, it<br />
presents the characteristics of foreign direct investment with its crucial role in the process of<br />
globalization and development of national economies. Then author discuss the reasons of the latest<br />
world economic crisis and its dissemination all over the world. In the light of economic crisis the<br />
article presents the role played by foreign direct investment in global economy. Author also presents<br />
changes in the juxtaposition of top sources and influx countries of foreign direct investment. Finally,<br />
author considerate government actions accelerating influx of foreign direct investment.<br />
Globalization of world economy and foreign direct investments<br />
Contemporary world economy is completely different from the economy of twenty or<br />
thirty years ago. One of the most important differences is the intensification of the process of<br />
globalization. This trend results in the widening influence of international capital on national<br />
economies and the changing characteristics of company operation. The location of<br />
production plants, research and development, as well as other activities of companies more<br />
and more often becomes independent of the existing national borders. (Buiter, Lago, Stern<br />
1997; Nowicka-Skowron, Kot 2003)<br />
Globalization is not a new phenomenon; it was a long time ago that people and<br />
corporations began to engage in long distance trading. What is more, for thousands of years<br />
people have invested into economic enterprise in foreign countries. Actually, the waves of<br />
globalization observed nowadays are very similar to those observed in the past. However,<br />
the politics and technological development of the last several decades has caused an<br />
extraordinarily accelerated development of foreign trade, cross border investments and<br />
migration of population in comparison to what was observed in the past. For instance, since<br />
1950 the value of world trade has increased twenty times, and the value of foreign<br />
investments between the years 1997 and 1999 nearly doubled, increasing from $468 billion to<br />
$827 billion. Having these facts in mind, Thomas Friedman summarized the present wave of<br />
globalization with the words “further, faster, cheaper and deeper.” (Friedman 2002)<br />
Globalization is defined in a variety of ways. According to A. Szymański, “the process of<br />
globalization refers to the increase in free flow of capital, goods and production factors<br />
among countries. Thus, it is a gradual disappearance of economic borders and a sharp<br />
quality improvement in the mobility of production factors.” (Szymański 2001)<br />
*<br />
Armii Krajowej 19B, 42-200 Czestochowa, Poland, e-mail: jagoda@zim.pcz.czest.pl
Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 135<br />
G. Gierszewska and B. Wawrzyniak define globalization as “the process of changing the<br />
national perspective from which one views the rules and regulations of conduct, occurrences,<br />
behavior, activity, and principles held, into a global perspective [translation mine].”<br />
(Gierszewska, Wawrzyniak 2001)<br />
Globalization can be defined as the process of interaction and integration among people,<br />
enterprises and governments of various countries, a process shaped by international trade<br />
and supported by information technology, and influencing the environment, culture,<br />
political systems, economic development, and the quality of life of societies all over the<br />
world. (www.globalisation101.org)<br />
Regardless of a definition of and an approach to the phenomenon of globalization (e.g.<br />
J.A. Scholte describes it as a five-dimensional phenomenon (Scholte 2005)) it can be proved<br />
that globalization functions within two main spheres: economic and social one. The first of<br />
these comprises finance, technology (in connection with research and development as well as<br />
the knowledge-based economy), market and market strategies (especially competition). As<br />
for the social sphere, it comprises culture, lifestyle, consumption models, management, legal<br />
regulations, and also political concepts. (Pakulska, Poniatowska-Jaksch 2008)<br />
On the other hand, A. Zorska points out the following characteristic features of<br />
globalization (Zorska 2007):<br />
• in the sphere of foreign direct investments (FDI) there have occurred the changes<br />
in the structure of their branches and geography, and all over the world there has<br />
been recorded an increase of their share in general gross investment expenditure<br />
with reference to fixed assets;<br />
• the expansion of the process of globalization is possible due to an intensity of<br />
international connections within branches and sectors of industry, etc.;<br />
• the range of forms of steady cooperation between companies is widening (joint<br />
venture, strategic alliances) in all value chain links and the partnership enterprises<br />
in the international market;<br />
• the number and significance of transnational corporations is growing in the<br />
economic structures of the world, entailing the change of relations between the<br />
state and the corporations (more and more often corporations influence the<br />
decisions of governments in particular countries).<br />
These are the foreign direct investments that play a crucial role in the process of<br />
globalization, at the same time supporting the development of national economies. The flow<br />
of capital in the shape of FDI facilitates an access to technologies, know-how and<br />
management skills, accelerating the integration of national economies with international<br />
markets, production and distribution networks, and strengthening the international<br />
competition of companies and whole national economies (UNCTAD 2002).<br />
Foreign direct investment (FDI) is the most advanced way of entering foreign markets,<br />
being an international transfer of capital in order to open an affiliated company in another<br />
country and exercise control over it. First of all, FDI is about capital investments, but also<br />
about intra-company re-invested profits and loans. The word “direct” indicates that the<br />
foreign investor has an influence over the activity of a company abroad. This fact differs FDI
136<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141)<br />
from a portfolio investment, which does not make it possible to influence the activities of<br />
companies abroad. (Pakulska, Poniatowska-Jaksch 2004)<br />
Foreign direct investment is a type of investment which entails long-term relationships<br />
and continuous involvement and control of an entity which has its headquarters in one of the<br />
national economies towards another entity, which has its headquarters in another country. In<br />
the case of FDI the investor can directly influence the management of a company in another<br />
country. The invested capital amounting to 10% of shares constitutes a defining feature of a<br />
FDI (UNCTAD 2004, Kot 2006).<br />
Foreign direct investment is not only a simple transfer of financial capital aiming solely at<br />
making profit within the framework of the global company strategy. It is more accurate to<br />
say that the financial capital constitutes an instrument which renders it possible to transfer<br />
across borders a set of production factors in order to exploit them in a more effective manner,<br />
and also facilitates making a better use of competitive advantage in the foreign market. Thus,<br />
apart from the transfer of capital, there takes place also the transfer of technology,<br />
knowledge, management methods and the marketing.<br />
There can be distinguished two basic forms of foreign direct investment: (Krzak 2005)<br />
• greenfield investments (independently starting new operational facilities from the<br />
ground up);<br />
• brownfield investments (taking over an already existing company and<br />
restructuring it, or a cooperation with a local partner in the form of a joint venture<br />
enterprise).<br />
Greenfield investments are characteristic of developing countries and consist in a foreign<br />
investor building new facilities from the ground up in the host country. Each country looks<br />
forward to greenfield investments, since this type of investments entails increasing<br />
production assets and creating new jobs (assuming that the national competition is not<br />
eliminated in this way). (Krzak 2005) On the other hand, brownfield investments in the<br />
shape of mergers and takeovers are a dominating form of investment in developed countries<br />
and usually take place when the controlling interest in one business entity is acquired by<br />
another business entity, or when two entities, situated in two different countries, agree to<br />
join their activities. If the invested capital is utilized to purchase the already existing assets,<br />
there follows modernization and more rational organization of work.<br />
Foreign direct investment at the time of global economic crisis<br />
The still growing economic, financial and social interdependencies which result from<br />
globalization have twofold consequences. On the one hand, these consequences are positive:<br />
influx of foreign capital, scientific and technological development, expansion of potential<br />
customers’ market, increasing effectiveness of economic activities, investment boom, and<br />
economic growth. On the other hand, a disadvantage of globalization is the fact that national<br />
economies become very sensitive to economic fluctuations in geographically distant regions.<br />
This is especially noticeable in the sphere of finance. The present world economic crisis has<br />
its roots in the subprime mortgage loans. Over the years of economic boom, the<br />
intermediaries responsible for organizing mortgage loans, given the incentive of high<br />
commissions, persuaded the people with small loans to accept mortgage loans with low
Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 137<br />
upfront fee or no upfront fee, and without checking out the loans. A serious crisis in the field<br />
of subprime mortgage loans started in July 2007, with the bankruptcy of two hedge funds<br />
(making their profit on small disparities in the exchange rate of various currencies) of the<br />
American investment bank Bear Stearns (The Economic Times, 2008). The world economic<br />
market has undergone considerable change since 2007, when the continuous noninflationary<br />
growth took place. As was forecast, the year 2008 proved that the crisis was<br />
endangering not only American economy, but world economy as well. (Sachs 2008) Towards<br />
the end of summer 2008 it seemed that the influence exercised by growing prices of energy<br />
would be diminished and the slumping economy was on its way to recovery. However, the<br />
autumn of 2008 brought a series of various interdependent upheavals. The improvement in<br />
housing economy triggered off credit crunch and continuous drop of stability in the financial<br />
market, combined with the threat of increasing inflation, dramatic fluctuations in the price of<br />
petroleum, and raising prices of goods accelerated by the weakening of American dollar. The<br />
results of all these factors became even more severe with a sudden rise in food prices<br />
(Committee on Economic… 2008). Between September 2008 and March 2009 the economy<br />
was receding at the pace of 5.5%. Financial institutions lost trillions of dollars, euros and<br />
French franks. Financial liquidity of a majority of institutions became threatened and the<br />
stock exchanges suffered severe drops. Central banks provided the support of hundreds of<br />
trillions worth, and the scope of their intervention was not limited to supporting markets but<br />
also included preventing the bankruptcy of individual institutions.<br />
According to the forecasts of a majority of economists, the crisis had to influence mainly<br />
“ripe” economies, such as the ones found in western Europe, since they were tightly<br />
connected financially with the USA. However, in reality the crisis has made an impact on the<br />
whole world. (Jahnson 2008)<br />
One of the results of the crisis in the mortgage market in 2007 in the USA was the<br />
unprecedented influx of investment funds into developing markets and markets which were<br />
undergoing a transformation. In September 2007, the funds investing money in the frontier<br />
markets gathered 15.7 billion dollars net from the investors. This was the largest sum in the<br />
history of this type of investment. Between early September and 25th October 2007, the funds<br />
in question gathered nearly 34 billion dollars, i.e. more than during the whole 2005 and 2006.<br />
(Jóźwik 2007) Therefore, it can be concluded that in 2007 there already took place another<br />
increase in portfolio investments. The funds which attract the most money of the investors<br />
are especially those which invest in Asia, Latin America, and specialize in BRIC countries<br />
(Brazil, Russia, India, China), and are global emerging funds.<br />
The year 2006, when the tendency for growth was observed, was actually the third year<br />
in a row of the increase in foreign direct investment, the situation being a worldwide<br />
phenomenon (UNCTAD 2007). In 2006, the considerable influx of foreign direct investment<br />
(FDI) amounted to USD 1.3 trillion, which meant the increase by another 38% in comparison<br />
with 27% in 2004 and 29% in 2005, as well as reaching the level close to that observed in 2000,<br />
when the record value of 1.3 trillion dollars was set up for FDI. The influx of FDI was<br />
noticeable in all major subregions: in developed countries, developing countries, and in<br />
countries undergoing transformations, i.e. in southeastern Europe and in the<br />
Commonwealth of Independent States. The growth tendency discussed above has been<br />
present throughout the last 26 years. However after uninterrupted growth in FDI activity in
138<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141)<br />
the period 2003–2007, global FDI inflows fell by 14% in 2008 to $1,697 billion, from a record<br />
high of $1,979 billion in 2007 (see Figure 1).<br />
Figure 1. FDI influx worldwide and in particular groups of economies, 1980-2008 (bln USD)<br />
2000<br />
1800<br />
1600<br />
1400<br />
1200<br />
Developing economies<br />
Developed economies<br />
Transition economies<br />
1000<br />
800<br />
600<br />
400<br />
200<br />
0<br />
1980<br />
1982<br />
1984<br />
1986<br />
1988<br />
1990<br />
1992<br />
1994<br />
1996<br />
1998<br />
2000<br />
2002<br />
2004<br />
2006<br />
2008<br />
Source: Author’s elaboration based on UNCTAD FDI/TNC database<br />
FDI flows fell further as the financial crisis entered a tumultuous new phase in September<br />
2008 following the collapse of Lehman Brothers (one of the largest financial institutions in<br />
the United States), and as major developed economies fell into, or approached, economic<br />
recession. In contrast, developing and transition economies saw FDI inflows rise in 2008 to<br />
record levels for both.<br />
Worldwide foreign investment reached the value of USD 12 trillion; the type of<br />
investment in question was made mainly by transnational corporations (TNC). The group of<br />
transnational corporations comprised about 82 000 parent companies and 810 000 foreign<br />
affiliate companies. (WIR 2009) According to business forecasting, the turnover, value added<br />
and export of the TNC in 2006 increased by 18%, 16% and 12% respectively. While the influx<br />
of FDI into developed countries increased by 45% and reached the value of USD 857 bln, the<br />
influx into developing countries amounted to USD 379 bln (21% increase), and the influx into<br />
economies undergoing a transformation amounted to USD 69 bln (68% increase), reaching<br />
the highest level in history. However, the international stature of TNC has not insulated<br />
them from the worst global recession in a generation. The 4.8% reduction in inward FDI<br />
stock worldwide was reflected in the decline in value of gross product, sales and assets, as<br />
well as employment of TNCs’ foreign affiliates in 2008, a marked contrast to huge doubledigit<br />
growth rates in 2006 and 2007.<br />
The United States regained the leading position with reference to the influx of foreign<br />
direct investment, leaving behind Great Britain and France. Among developing countries
Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 139<br />
and the countries whose economies were undergoing a transformation, nearly all regions<br />
noticed a considerable increase in the influx of FDI in 2006. Only in Oceania, South America<br />
and the South African Republic there was an outflow of FDI. In the group of developing<br />
countries the influence of FDI was the most significant in China, Hong Kong (China) and<br />
Singapore. As for the economies undergoing a transformation, the largest influx of FDI was<br />
observed in Russia.<br />
Developed countries still remained the major source of investments (84% of all<br />
investments made). In 2006, the largest exporter of foreign direct investments were the<br />
United States (USD 217 bln). The USA was followed by the EU countries, i.e. France (USD<br />
115 bln), Spain (USD 90 bln) and Great Britain (USD 79 bln). The role played by developing<br />
economies and economies undergoing a transformation as a source of foreign direct<br />
investment was still growing. In the group of developing economies, the most important part<br />
was played by Hong Kong (China), with USD 43 bln, and in the group of economies<br />
undergoing a transformation the most important role was played by Russia, with USD 18<br />
bln. The value of foreign direct investments flowing out of these two groups of countries<br />
amounted to USD 193 bln, i.e. 16% of the overall world outflow of FDI. United States stayed<br />
still on the top FDI source country all over the world after crisis effects dissemination but<br />
there are changes on next places of the juxtaposition of top sources of FDI outflows. There<br />
are France, Germany, Japan and then United Kingdom as a main FDI sources (see Figure 2).<br />
Figure 2. Developed countries: top 10 sources of FDI outflows 2007-2008 (bln USD)<br />
Netherlands<br />
Belgium<br />
29<br />
58<br />
68<br />
94<br />
2007<br />
Spain<br />
77<br />
96<br />
2008<br />
Canada<br />
Switzerland<br />
50<br />
60<br />
78<br />
86<br />
United Kingdom<br />
111<br />
275<br />
Japan<br />
74<br />
128<br />
Germany<br />
156<br />
180<br />
France<br />
225<br />
220<br />
United States<br />
312<br />
378<br />
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400<br />
Source: Author’s elaboration based on UNCTAD FDI/TNC database
140<br />
Economic Analysis (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141)<br />
Conclusions<br />
Governments actions are very important in FDI acceleration, it is especially important in<br />
case of crisis. The governments implemented measures accelerating the influx of FDI during<br />
2006 and at the beginning of 2007, however, at this time in some sectors of industry,<br />
especially those of “strategic” significance, there were introduced new restrictions with<br />
reference to takeover of assets by foreigners, or such measures which assured a larger share<br />
of governments in the profits. Such tendencies were observed especially in mining industry.<br />
In 2006 there were made the total of 147 government decisions making a given country more<br />
FDI-friendly, while the 37 government decisions were made to the contrary, in 2008, 110 new<br />
FDI-related measures were introduced, of which 85 were more favorable to FDI, compared<br />
to previous year, percentage of less favorable measures for FDI remained unchanged (WIR<br />
2009). In 2008 and the first half of 2009, despite concerns about a possible rise in investment<br />
protectionism, the general trend in FDI policies remained one of greater openness, including<br />
lowering barriers to FDI and lowering corporate income taxes.<br />
References<br />
Buiter W., Lago R., Stern N.: Promoting an effective market economy in a changing world, [in:] Sabot R.,<br />
Szekely P. (eds): Development strategy and management of the market economy, Vol. 2, Clarendon<br />
Press/Oxford University Press, Oxford, 1997.<br />
Committee on Economic Affairs and Development Provisional Report “OECD and the World economy”<br />
July 11th, 2008.<br />
Development and globalization: facts and figures. United Nations, New York and Geneva 2004.<br />
Friedman T. L.: Longitudes and Attitudes. Exploring the World After September 11., Farrar, Straus and<br />
Giroux. New York 2002.<br />
Gierszewska G., Wawrzyniak B.: Globalizacja. Wyzwania dla zarządzania strategicznego, Poltext,<br />
Warszawa 2001.<br />
Jahnson P.: Americans should mount their blessings. Forbes, June 30, 2008.<br />
Jóźwik T.: Pieniądze płyną na rynki wschodzące, Forbes 12/2007.<br />
Kot S.: Global Trends in Foreign Direct Investment, [in:] Kościelniak H (ed): Processes of Capital Supply in<br />
Production Enterprises, Wyd. WZPCzęst Częstochowa 2006.<br />
Krzak M.: Źródła wzrostu. Forbes 12/2007.<br />
Nowicka-Skowron M., Kot S.: Logistic Aspects of the Economyʹs Globalization and Integration [in:] R.<br />
Borowiecki (ed): Management of Organizations During Economic Integration and Globalization, Wyd.<br />
AE Kraków, Warsaw-Cracow 2003.<br />
Pakulska T., Poniatowska-Jaksch M.: Korporacje transnarodowe a globalne pozyskiwanie zasobów, Oficyna<br />
Wydawnicza SGH, Warszawa 2009.<br />
Pakulska T., Poniatowska-Jaksch M.: Bezpośrednie inwestycje zagraniczne w Europie Środkowo-<br />
Wschodniej. Koncepcja kapitału zagranicznego w Polsce, Oficyna Wydawnicza SGH, Warszawa 2004,<br />
Sachs J.: Ameryka w końcu zapłaci swoje rachunki. Europa nr 14 (209), 2008.<br />
Scholte J.A., Globalization: a critical introduction, Palgrave Macmillan; 2Rev Ed edition 2005.<br />
Szymański A.: Globalizacja, wyzwania i zagrożenia, Difin, Warszawa 2001.<br />
The Development Dimension of Foreign Direct Investment: Policies to Enhance the Role of FDI, in the National<br />
and International Context – Policy Issues to Consider, United Nations Conference on Trade and<br />
Development, Washington DC, 23 September 2002.<br />
The Economic Times: Global financial crisis: The story so far. September 21, 2008.
Ślusarczyk, B., FDI and Global Economic Crisis, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 134-141) 141<br />
World Investment Report 2009, Transnational Corporations, Agricultural Production and Development.<br />
United Nations, New York and Geneva, 2009.<br />
www.globalisation101.org<br />
Zorska A., Korporacje transnarodowe. Przemiany, oddziaływania, wyzwania, PWE, Warszawa 2007.<br />
Article history:<br />
Received: 15 January 2010<br />
Accepted: 21 April 2010
REVIEW<br />
BOOK REVIEW<br />
INFLATION AND UNEMPLOYMENT<br />
by<br />
Bojan Dimitrijević<br />
There’s no book or a study guide in contemporary macroeconomic literature which don’t<br />
deal with a Phillips curve as analytical instrument that explains relation between<br />
unemployment rate and a rate of wage changes. The Phillips curve became obligatory part of<br />
macroeconomic theory, subject of numerous empirical examinations, theoretical discussions<br />
and controversies, conclusions and recommendations for concrete application in shaping<br />
economic policy. A modern version of Phillips curve in combination with IS - LM and AS –<br />
AD model indicates how inflation, unemployment, and GDP can be affected through<br />
monetary and fiscal policy, as well as managing aggregate demand and supply.<br />
The author’s objective is to show theoretical fundamentals of Phillips curve and Phillips-<br />
Okun’s model; to point out the place of this concept in leading theoretical schools – it’s<br />
genesis and numerous research related to it.<br />
The book consists of six chapters. In the first chapter, author deals with theoretical<br />
fundamentals and genesis of Phillips curve, as well as development phases of this concept.<br />
Intellectual influences and predecessors of Phillips concept are displayed. Furthermore, the<br />
original Phillips curve, Lipsey model and modification of this concept, Friedman – Phelps’<br />
hypothesis of natural rate of unemployment (NRU) and vertical Phillips curve in rational<br />
expectations theory.<br />
The second chapter displays Phillips-Okun’s model originated by synthesis of Phillips<br />
curve and Okun’s curve. Phillips-Okun’s model could be simply articulated as a relation<br />
between gross domestic product and rate of inflation. In this chapter author presents Okun’s<br />
law, associating Okun’s and Phillips curve and comparing economic policies and<br />
macroeconomic aggregates in the Phillips-Okun’s model and IS – LM model. At the end of<br />
chapter, author deals with theoretical aspects of inflation, it’s quantification and economic<br />
policies concerning this economic phenomenon. The third chapter presents comparative<br />
analysis of relevant schools of economic thought: Neoclassical, Keynesianism, Monetarism<br />
and Rational expectations school (RATEX); their basic postulates and relationship to labor<br />
market. Furthermore, it explains concept and characteristics of natural rate of unemployment<br />
(NRU) and non - accelerating inflation rate of unemployment (NAIRU).<br />
The fourth chapter is heterogeneous and presents numerous researches related to Phillips<br />
curve: labor market models and analysis of institutional factors on labor market, role and<br />
significance of syndicate, empirical research on behavior of Phillips curve in OECD<br />
countries, etc.
Lovre, I., et al., Book Review, EA (2010, Vol. 43, No. 1-2, 142-143) 143<br />
In the fifth chapter author examines economic system of Yugoslavia, assessing empirical<br />
and theoretical research of inflation, unemployment and GDP in the period between 1956<br />
and 1990. Moreover, this chapter provides a review of economic literature which is dealing<br />
with Phillips and Okunʹs curve and an attempt of creating empirical foundations of these<br />
two theoretical concepts in Yugoslavian economic system.<br />
In the sixth chapter author is analyzing contemporary research of Phillips curve and its<br />
implementation in modern concepts of macroeconomics and economic policies. In this<br />
chapter following issues are elaborated: hysteresis as an answer of New Keynesianism,<br />
alternative hysteresis theories, relation between adaptive and rational expectations, Lucas<br />
supply function and Lucas critiques, implementation of Phillips curve in welfare economics<br />
and game theory, analysis of Phillips curve in developing and transition countries; with<br />
special interest in behavior of Phillips curve during stagflation period from 1980 to 2000.<br />
As a supplement to this book, author presents his empirical research about possibility of<br />
existence of Phillips curve in Yugoslavian economy in the period between 1982 to 1990.<br />
The book contains numerous contemporary methods, a number of charts and<br />
spreadsheets, and portrayal of basic relations of Phillips curve and macroeconomic models.<br />
Author used voluminous literature and a great number of empirical researches related to this<br />
topic. A vast number of statistical and econometrical methods, as well as comparative<br />
analyses of myriad scientific papers, theories and economic schools are employed.<br />
The author is trying to find an answer for the following basic question: Could Phillips<br />
curve be used as an economic tool in macroeconomic policy? By using relatively modest<br />
econometric methodology, he gets to the right conclusion that Phillips curve is not applicable<br />
in Yugoslavian economy and couldn’t be used as useful theoretical instrument in<br />
macroeconomic policy.<br />
The book is logically structured with valid conclusions. On the basis of presented<br />
analysis of Phillips curve, its reflection on contemporary economic schools, comparative<br />
analysis of leading theoretical schools – as well as analysis of labour market – it presents<br />
useful and current macroeconomic study guide for economists, academics, researchers,<br />
business people and students.<br />
Lovre Ivan, Perić Mladen<br />
University EDUCONS, Faculty for business economics, Sremska Kamenica
ECONOMIC ANALYSIS<br />
Price and Ordering<br />
Freqency: <strong>Twice</strong> a year (1 volume of 2 issues)<br />
For purchase of this journal, contact eaoffice@ien.bg.ac.rs<br />
Institutional price:<br />
EUR 50 for European countries<br />
US$ 70 for US, CANADA, Australia<br />
Student price:<br />
EUR 35 for European countries<br />
US $ 50 for US, CANADA, Australia<br />
Print copies of individual issues can be purchased by contacting the EA <strong>Journal</strong>s Customer<br />
Service department.<br />
Zmaj Jovina 12, 11000 Belgrade, Serbia<br />
Ordering information:<br />
Tel: +381 11 2622-357 and 2629-960<br />
Fax: +381 11 2181-471
Author Guidelines<br />
General outline<br />
Authors submitting to the Economic Analysis are requested to email full paper in English. Pictures, if<br />
imported, should be placed separately in the zip file in TIFF, JPG, GIF or CDR format in resolution of<br />
300 dpi.<br />
Manuscripts are blind reviewed with the understanding that they are substantially new and have not<br />
been previously published in whole (excluding conference preceding). Publisher has the copyright to<br />
all published articles.<br />
Practical guidelines<br />
1. The length of the manuscript should not exceed 20 pages (including notes, references, appendices,<br />
tables, figures, charts, etc.). A paper must be written in English in text processor Microsoft Word,<br />
using font Palatino Linotype (size 11), in Latin alphabet, single spacing.<br />
2. Page setup: A4, margins: top 3 cm; bottom 3 cm; left 2,5 cm; right 2,5 cm.<br />
3. Paragraph setup: first line indentation 0,6 cm, paragraph spacing: before 2 pt and after 2 pt.<br />
4. Title: right, bold, size 16.<br />
5. The author’s name: last, middle and first name (bold, size 11) without titles. The authorʹs<br />
affiliation name of institution, city, state, and country should be together with the authorʹs name.<br />
Behind the name of the first author, a footnote should be inserted containing address and email of<br />
the first author.<br />
6. Abstract: italic, size 11, 3 line behind the author’s name, the maximum length of 250 words. Key<br />
words should be 1 line behind the abstract up to ten key words.<br />
7. Avoid endnotes. If they cannot be avoided list them at the end of the manuscript, before the<br />
references.<br />
8. Tables and figures should be numbered (1,2,3 etc.), in italics centred. All tables and figures<br />
(drawings) must be black & white.<br />
9. Structure of the manuscript (only two levels). First heading: left, bold, size 12, before 18 after 9 pt.<br />
Second heading: left indention 0,6 cm, bold, size 12, before 12 after 6 pt.<br />
10. Reference to articles and books in the text: Give full name (first name, middle initial, and last<br />
name) of author(s) and year of publication in the first citation, with page number(s) where<br />
appropriate. For example: Glenn Firebaugh (1999) [first reference]; Firebaugh (1999)<br />
[subsequently]; Andrea Boltho and Gianni Toniolo (1999) [first reference], Boltho and Toniolo<br />
(1999) [subsequently]; Albert Berry, François Bourguignon, and Christian Morrisson (1983) [first<br />
reference], Berry, Bourguignon, and Morrisson (1983) [subsequently]. When more than one work<br />
by the same author is cited, give the last name of author and year of publication in parentheses for<br />
each subsequent citation. When listing a string of references within the text, arrange first in<br />
chronological order, then alphabetically within years. If there are four or more authors, refer to the<br />
first author, followed by et al. and the year; for example: Stefan Fölster et al. (1998). If there is<br />
more than one publication referred to in the same year by the author(s), use the year and a, b, etc.<br />
(example: 1997a, b). References to authors in the text must exactly match those in the Reference<br />
section.<br />
11. List of references (in alphabetical order by authorʹ last names) should be at the end of the<br />
manuscript. Economic analysis use AEA rules for references.<br />
12. Abstracts would be sent to Editor-in-Chief by email
INSTITUTE OF ECONOMIC SCIENCE<br />
Zmaj Jovina 12, 11000 Belgrade<br />
Serbia<br />
Tel. + 381 2622-357; 2629-960<br />
Fax: +381 (11) 2181~471<br />
CIP - Каталогизација у публикацији<br />
Народна библиотека Србије, Београд<br />
33<br />
ECONOMIC Analysis / Editor-in-chief<br />
Mirjana Radović-Marković. - Vol. 42, no. 1<br />
(2009)- . - Belgrade (Zmaj Jovina 12) :<br />
Institute of Economic Sciences, 2009- (Novi<br />
Sad : SP print). - 30 cm<br />
Polugodišnje. - Je nastavak: Economic<br />
analysis and workersʹ management = ISSN<br />
0351-286X<br />
ISSN 1821-2573 = Economic Analysis (Belgrade)<br />
COBISS.SR-ID 169576460